七年级上册英语完形填空、阅读理解综合训练100题含答案.pdf

七年级上册英语完形填空、阅读理解训练100题含答案一、完形填空Hello, Tm Henry. I am a student of No. 15 Middle School. I am 13 years old. There aresome new 1 in our school. Lefs get to know them.Frank is my friend. He is also 2 years old. He is an English boy. He is from3 , a very big city in England. And 4 is his favourite colour. Ifs thecolour of the orange. He often goes to the library, because he thinks it's a good place to5 books. His father is a 6 in our school. His students like7 very muchThis nice girl is Amy. She is E n g l i s h , 8 she can speak Chinese very well.She is in China with her parents now. She says 9 is her favourite season, becauseshe can go swimming in hot weather. Amy doesn't like math and she says it's too difficult.Her 10 cooks delicious food for her every day because she doesn't go to work.We go to school at eight H start work at half past eight. We have threelessons in the 12. At eleven, we go to the playground and 1 3football. It is very interesting. We have 14 in the dining hall at twelve. I likeschool lunch! We have meat and rice 15 vegetables, or hamburgers.We like our new school1 a lot.1. A. treesB.buildingsC.studentsD. teachers2.A. twelveB. thirteenC.fourteenD. fifteen3.A. BeijingB. Tokyoc.LondonD. New York4.A. orangeB. redc.blackD. green5.A. putB. openc.readD. draw6.A. teacherB. driverc.doctorD. actor7.A. herB. himc.themD. us8.A. andB. orc.butD. so9.A. springB.summerc.autumnD. winter10., A. fatherB.motherc.brotherD. grandpa11.A. andB. butc.orD. because12.. A. noonB.morningc.afternoonD. evening13.A.makeB. takeC.playD. have14. A.breakfastB. dinnerC.supperD.lunch15. A.withB.forc.andD. at【 答案】i. C2. B3. C4. A5. C6. A7. B8. C9. B10. B11. A12. B13. C14. D15. A【 分析】文章Henry介绍了他的同学的情况以及学校生活的情况。

1 . 句意：我们学校有一些新生trees 树；buildings 建筑物；students 学生；teachers 老师；根据"Let's get to know them.Frank is my fiend...This nice girl is Amy.”可知，这里介绍的是学生，故选 Co2 . 句意：他也十三岁twelve 卜二；thirteen 十 三 ;fourteen 十 四 ;fifteen 十五;根据"I am 13 years old.”以及“also”可 知 , Frank也 是 13岁，故选B3 . 句意：他来自英国的一个大城市伦敦Beijing 北京；Tokyo 东京；London 伦敦；New York 纽约;根据“a very big city inEngland”可知，属于英国的是伦敦，故选C4 . 句意：橙色是他最喜欢的颜色orange 橙色；red 红色；black 黑色；green 绿色；根据"It's the colour of the orange."可知，橙色是他最喜欢的颜色，故选A5 . 句意：他经常去图书馆，因为他认为那是读书的好地方put 放；open 打开；read 读；draw 画；根据“He often goes to the library”可知，图书馆是看书的好地方，故选C。

6 . 句意：他的父亲是我们学校的老师teacher 老 师 ;driver 司机；doctor 医 生 ;actor 演员；根据"in our school. His studentslike...”可知，他的父亲是老师，故选A7 . 句意：他的学生非常喜欢他her她；him他；them他们；us我们：此处指代的是Frank的父亲，作宾语，应用宾格h im ,故选B8 . 句意：她是英国人，但汉语说得很好and和；o r或者；but但是；so 因此；空格前后是转折关系，应用but连接，故选C9 . 句意：她说夏天是她最喜欢的季节spring 春天；summer 夏天；autumn 秋天； winter 冬天； 根据"because she can goswimming in hot weather.“可知，能在热天游泳的季节应该是夏天，故选B„1 0 .句意：她妈妈每天为她做美味的食物，因为她不上班father 爸 爸 ;mother 妈妈；brother 兄 弟 ;grandpa 爷爷；根据"because she doesn't go towork.”可知，此处指的是女性，应该是说妈妈做饭，故选B。

11 . 句意：我们八点上学，八点半开始上课and和；but但是；o r或者；because因为；空格前后是并列关系，应用and连接，故选Ao12 . 句意：我们上午有三节课noon 中午；morning 上午；afternoon 下午；evening 晚上；根据"at eight... at half pasteight...At eleven”可知，动作是按照时间顺序描写的，此处应该是说上午有三节课，故选 B13 . 句意：十一点，我们去操场踢足球make 制造；take 拿；play 玩；have 有；根据“we go to the playground and...fdotball”可知，去操场是踢足球，故选C14 . 句意：我们十二点在餐厅吃午饭breakfast 早餐；dinner 晚餐；supper 晚饭；lunch 午餐；根据“at twelve”可知，中午 12点吃的是午餐，故选D15 . 句意：我们有肉、米饭和蔬菜，或者汉堡包with和. . .一起；for为了； and和；a t在. . . . ；此处指的是米饭里有蔬菜，表示伴随用介词w ith ,故选AI have a good friend. Her name is Kate. She is 16 American girl. She is eleven.She 17 with her family in China. There 18 four people in her family. They'reher father, her mother, her brother and herself. She has a cat. 19 name is Mimi. It'sSunday today. They 20 at home. Look! Kate 21 with Mimi. Her father isreading newspapers. Her mother is cleaning the house. Where is her brother Jim? He is doing22 homework in his study. Kate 23 Chinese very much, but she can't24 it very well. Jim likes 25 soccer. He can play it very well.16. A. aB. anC. the17. A. liveB. livingC. lives18. A. isB. areC. am19. A. ItB. IfsC. Its20. A. are allB. are bothC. all are21. A. playB. playsC. .is playing22. A. heB. hisC. her23. A. likeB. to likeC. likes24. A. speakB. tellC. say25. A. playingB. playsC. to play【 答案】16. B17. C18. B19. C20. A21. C22. B23. C24. A25. A【 分析】本文叙述了美国女孩凯特及家人的生活情况。

他们家一共四口人，她的父亲，母亲，哥哥和她他们家有一只猫叫咪咪他们住在中国今天是星期天，他们都在家她父亲在看报纸，母亲在打扫房间，哥哥在做作业，她正在和咪咪玩16 . 句意：她是一个美国女孩a 一个； an 一个；Ihe那个修饰American元音音素开头的名词，故用不定冠词a n .故选Bo17 . 句意：她和她的家人住在北京live居住； living居住； lives居住；主语she是第三人称单数，故谓语用liv es,故选 C18 . 句意：她家有四口人is是； a re 是； am 是主语是four people名词复数形式，因此谓语是are故选Bo19 . 句意：它的名字叫咪咪i t 它；it's它是；its它的；修饰名词nam e故用形容词性物主代词its20 . 句意：他们都在家are all三者或三者以上都是； both a re 两者都是；all a re 三者或三者以上都是根据It*s Sunday today可知今天是星期天，因此都在家，此处用肯定句all位于be动词之后，实义动词之前21 . 句意：看 ！凯特正在和咪咪玩play玩； plays玩；is playing玩；根据Look!可知此处用现在进行时， 故选C。

22 . 句意：他正在他的书房做他的作业h e 他； h is 他的； her她的do one's homework做作业因为主语是h e ,故用his,,故选 Bo23 . 句意：凯特非常喜欢汉语lik e喜欢； to like喜欢； likes喜欢；因为主语是Kate,第三人称单数，故谓语用likes故选， Co24 . 句意：但是她说汉语说的不是非常好speak说，侧重语言； te ll告诉； say说，侧重内容 此处强调说汉语，故用动词speak„ 故选 Ao25 . 句意：吉姆喜欢踢足球playing 玩；plays 玩；to play 玩；like doing sth .喜欢做某事故选 ACindy is my good friend. She likes sports very much. She is good at volleyball and she'sa 26 star in our school. She eats healthily. She likes eating 27 food every day.She 28 two eggs, and some milk for breakfast. She likes salad, carrots and chicken forlunch. For, dinner she eats tomatoes, broccoli and bananas. She likes ice-cream very much29 she doesn't eat it, because she doesn't want to 30 fat. So she is veryhealthy.26. A. soccerB. volleyballC. basketball27. A. healthyB. healthC. unhealthy28. A. haveB. hasC. eat29. A. butB. becauseC. and30. A. isB. areC. be【 答案】26. B27. A28. B29. A30. C【 分析】本文主要介绍了作者的好朋友Cindy的兴趣爱好以及饮食习惯。

26 . 句意：她擅长排球，是我们学校的排球明星soccer 足球；volleyball 排球；basketball 篮球根据"She is good at voIleybaH”可知，擅长排球，所以是排球明星，故选B27 . 句意：她每天喜欢吃健康的食物healthy健康的；health健康；unhealthy不健康的此空用形容词修饰名词fo o d ,根据“She eats healthily.”可知，是吃健康的食物，故选A28 . 句意：她早餐吃两个鸡蛋，喝一些牛奶have吃 ; has吃 ; eat吃have sth for+三餐，表示“ 某餐吃. . .” ,句子是一般现在时，主语she是第三人称单数，动词用第三人称单数形式，故选B29 . 句意：她非常喜欢冰淇淋，但是她不吃它but但是；because因为；and和空格前后句表转折关系，故选A30 . 句意：因为她不想变胖is用于主语是第三人称或单数形式；are用于主语是第二人称或复数形式；be动词原形want to do sth.：想要做某事，此空用动词原形，故选CJack: Good afternoon, Bill. What's this 31 English?Bill: Good 32 . Jack. It's a jacket. What color is it?Jack: It9s black. It's a black jacket. Do you like（ 喜欢） 33 ?Bill: No, I like blue. My jackets 34 blue.Jack: What's that?Bill: It9s a 35 . And it?s 36 .Jack: Is that your cup?Bill : No, 37 isn't. It's Jim's（ .......的） blue cup.Jack: 38 is your phone number, Bill?Bill: My phone number? It's 929-3160.Jack: What's your 39 name, Bill?Bill: Ifs Miller. Kate Miller is my 40 .31. A. onB. ofC. in32. A. afternoonB.morningC. evening33. A. redB. blackC. blue34. A. amB. isC. are35. A. cupB. bagC. dog36. A. whiteB. purpleC. blue37. A. heB. itC. they38. A. WhatB. WhoC. How39. A. middleB. firstC. family40. A. fatherB. sisterC. brother【 答案】31. C32. A33. B34. C35. A36. C37. B38. A39. C40. B【 分析】这是一组打招呼后的日常对话，询问物品以及其颜色等信息。

31 . 句意：这个用英语怎么说？on在……上；o f 属于……的；in用通过空后的“English”可知, 这里是指用英语怎么说, in English用英语32 . 句意：下午好，杰克afternoon下午；morning早上；evening晚上上文“Good afternoon”可知，时间在下午33 . 句意：你喜欢黑色吗？red红色；black黑色；blue蓝色通过上文“It's a black jacket”可知，讨论的颜色是黑色故选Bo34 . 句意：我的夹克是蓝色的am 是，主语是I； is是，be动词的三单形式；are是，be动词的复数形式因为句子主语是复数，时态为一般现在时，应用are35 . 句意：这是一只杯子cup杯子；bag包；dog狗通过"Is that your cup?”可知, 空处提到的是杯子故选Ao36 . 句意：这是蓝色的white 白色；purple 紫 色 ; blue 蓝色通过"It'sJim's （ . . .的）bluecup. ”可知，这是一只蓝色的杯子37 . 句意：不，这不是he他；it它；they他 （ 她、它）们通过"Is that your cup?”可知, 这里指代单数物体，应用代词it。

故选B38 . 句意：比尔，你的号码是多少？What 什么；Who 谁；How 怎么样通过“My phone number? It's 929-3160. ” 可知，这里在询问比尔的号码39 . 句意：比尔，你姓什么？middle 中间；first 第一；family 家庭通过"It's Miller. Kate Miller is my sister”可知，这里问比尔的姓氏，family name表示“ 姓” 故选Co40 . 句意：凯特・ 米勒是我的姐姐（ 妹妹） father父亲； sister姐妹；brother兄弟通过“Kate Miller”可知，凯特・ 米勒是女孩的名字，选项只有sister符合阅读下面的短文，从每小题所给的A、B、C、D 四个选项中，选出可填入空白处的最佳选项，使短文意思完整Today is Sunday. Bob is free, so he goes to the 41 . There he sees many animals likemonkeys, tigers and 42 . He likes monkeys and he thinks they are clever. On his wayhome in the 43 . he 44 a little girl. She can't find her 45 . Bob wants to 46her. The girl is about three years old. 47 name is Betty. She doesn't know her mother's48 number. She only （ 仅仅） tells Bob her mother has long yellow 49 . Bob sees a50 with long yellow hair, but she isn't the girl's mother. At about 4 o'clock, Bob findsthe girl's mother. The mother says 51 to Bob. "It's very 52 of you. Thank you verymuch.^^ Bob is happy to help Betty.41. A. zooB.schoolC .hospitalD. farm42. A. busesB. treesC .peopleD. elephants43. A. morningB. afternoonc.eveningD. a.m.44. A. getsB.meetsc.asksD. plays45. A. sisterB. brotherc.motherD. father46. A. helpB.thankc.teachD. like47. A. HisB.Herc.MyD. Your48. A. clothesB. namec.homeD. telephone49. A. hairB. legsc.faceD. neck50. A. manB. womanc.boyD. girl51. A. helloB. goodbyec.hiD. thanks52. A. tallB. cutec.kindD. clever【 答案】41. A42. D43. B44. B45. C46. A47. B48. D49. A50. B51. D52. C【 导语】本文讲述了鲍勃帮助走失的小女孩找到母亲的故事。

41 . 句意：鲍勃有空，所以他去了动物园zoo 动物园；school 学校；hospital 医院；farm 农场根据下文“There he sees manyanimals like monkeys, tigers and ...”可知, 鲍勃去了动物园故选 A42 . 句意：在那里，他看到了许多动物，例如猴子、老虎和大象buses 公共汽车；trees 树；people 人 们 ; elephants 大象根据上文“There he sees manyanimals”可知，在动物园里，鲍勃看到了许多动物四个选项中只有D 选项为动物43 . 句意：下午在回家的路上，他遇到了一个小女孩morning 早上；afternoon 下午；evening 晚上；a.m.上午根据下文“At about 4 o,clock,,可推知，此处指下午，故选B44 . 句意：下午在回家的路上，他遇到了一个小女孩gets 获得；meets 遇到；asks 问；plays 玩根据下文“ She can't find her ... Bob wantsto ...her”可知，鲍勃遇到了一个小女孩45 . 句意：她找不到她的妈妈。

sister 姐妹；brother 兄 弟 ; mother 母 亲 ; father 父亲根据下文“She doesn't know hermother's ... number”可知，女孩找不到自己母亲了故选C«46 . 句意：鲍勃想帮助她help 帮助；thank 感谢；teach 教育；like 喜欢根据下文“At about 4 o'clock, Bob findsthe giiTs mother”可知，鲍勃想帮女孩找到她的妈妈47 . 句意：这个女孩大约三岁她叫贝蒂His他的；Her她的；M y我 的 ; Your你 （ 们）的根据上文“The girl is about threeyears old”可知，此处指的是这个女孩的名字是贝蒂48 . 句意：她不知道她母亲的号码clothes衣服；name名 字 ; home家 ; telephone根据空格后“number”提示，此处指的是号码，即“tel叩hone number”49 . 句意：她只是告诉鲍勃，她妈妈有一- 头长长的黄头发hair 头发；legs 腿；face 脸；neck 脖子根据下文“Bob sees a woman with long yellowhair”可知，女孩告诉鲍勃，她妈妈有一头长长的黄头发。

故选A50 . 句意：鲍勃看到一个留着黄色长发的女人，但她不是女孩的母亲man 男人；woman 女人；boy 男孩；girl 女孩根据下文“but she isn't the girPs mother^^可知，此处指的是鲍勃看见的那个女人不是女孩的母亲51 . 句意：（ 女孩的）妈妈对鲍勃说谢谢hello你好；goodbye再见；h i嗨，你好；thanks谢谢根据下文“Thank you verymuch.”可推知，女孩的妈妈是向鲍勃表示感谢52 . 句意：你真好非常感谢lall高的；cute可爱的；kind善良的；clever聪明的根据上文“Bob wants to help her…The mother says thanks to Bob”可知，鲍勃出于善意帮助小女孩找到了母亲，所以女孩母亲感谢了鲍勃，说他很善良Dear Sally,How are you? I'm happy to be your friend. My name is Mike. I'm 53 Chinanow. I have a 54. He is my aunt's son. His 55 is Tom Miller. Tom ishis 56 name. His family name is Miller. He is 57 and his room istidy, too.Look! It is a 58 of his r o o m. 59 books are in the bookcase. Hisclock and tape player 60 on the table. His schoolbag is on the 61. Hispencil box is on the desk, too. His schoolbag is g r e e n . 62 is his pencil box? Oh,it's yellow. Some pens and a set of keys 63 in the pencil box. 64 isunder the desk? Oh, it's a baseball, but it's not 65.It's his brother Alan Tomhas a computer. It9s on the table. On the wall, there is a photo of his 66. Thereare（ 有） four people（ A ） in his family.This is my cousin's r o o m. 67 your room? Are you tidy, too?Yours,Mike53.A. atB. ofC. forD. in54.A.teacherB. daughterC. brotherD. cousin55.A.nameB. homeC. schoolD. room56.A. lastB.nextC. firstD. English57.A.tidyB. fineC, goodD. nice58.A.planeB. phoneC. photoD. player59.A.someB. aC. anD. one60.A. isB. areC. beD. /61.A. deskB. chairC. bedD. sofa62.A. WhereB. WhatC. What colorD. How63.A.beB. amC. isD. are64.A.WhereB. WhoC. HowD. What65.A. hisB. herC. hersD. he66.A.brotherB. familyC. parentsD. friends67.A. WhatB.Ask forC. What aboutD. What color【 答案】53. D54. D55. A56. C57. A58. C59. A60. B61. A62. C63. D64. D65. A66. B67. C【 分析】本文是Mike写给Sally的信，信中介绍了他的表弟Tom的情况。

53 . 句意：我现在在中国a t在 某 处 （ 小地点） ；of.… 的；for为了； in 在 某 处 （ 大地点） 此处用方位介词，表示“ 在某地” ，且为大地点54 . 句意：我有一个表弟teacher 老师；daughter 女儿；brother 兄弟；cousin 表亲根据“He is my aunt's son.“可知他是我舅妈的儿子，因此是表弟55 . 句意：他的名字是Tom Millername名字；home家 ; school学 校 ; room房间Tom Miller是名字56 . 句意：Tom是他的名last 最后的；next 下一个；first 第一；English 英语first name 表示' ‘ 名 故 选 C57 . 句意：他是爱整洁的tidy整洁的；fine好的；good好 的 ; nice友好的根据”...his room is tidy, too.”可知他是整洁的58 . 句意：这是一张他房间的照片plane飞机；phone；photo相 片 ; player玩家a photo of表示” . . .的 照 片 故 选C59 . 句意：书在书架里。

some一些；a 一个；an 一个；one一个books是名词复数，因此用some修饰故选Ao60 . 句意：他的表和录音机在桌子上is是，主语是第三人称单数；are是，主语是复数名词或you； be be动词原形主语“His clock and tape player”是复数，be 动词用 are故选 B61 . 句意：他的书包在书桌上desk 书桌；chair 椅 子 ; bed 床 : sofa 沙发根据"His pencil box is on the desk, too.” 可知书包在桌子上62 . 句意：他的铅笔盒什么颜色？where哪 里 ; what什 么 ; what color什么颜色; how怎样根据“Oh, it5s yellow.”可知问句询问颜色，用 What color提问63 . 句意：一些钢笔和一串钥匙在铅笔盒里be动词原形；am 是，主语是I； is是，主语是第三人称单数；are是，主语是复数名词或you主语“Some pens and a set of keys”是复数，be动词用are6 4 .句意：什么在书桌下？where哪里；who谁 ; how怎 样 ; what什么。

根据“Oh, it's a baseball...”可知问句是对物的询问，用 what引导6 5 .句意：哦，那是个棒球，但是它不是他的his他的，形容词性物主代词/ 名词性物主代词；her她的，宾格/ 形容词性物主代词；hers她的，名词性物主代词；he他，人称代词主格空后没有名词，用名词性物主代词根据"His pencil box is on the desk, too.”可知此处指代他，用 his6 6 .句意：在墙上，有一幅他的全家福brother 兄弟；family 家人；parents 父母；friends 朋友根据"There are( 有) fourpeople(A) in his family.”可知墙上是全家福6 7 .句意：你的房间怎么样？What什 么 ; Ask for询问；What about.......怎么样；What color什么颜色根据“Areyou tidy, too?”可知此处询问你的房间怎么样，也一样整洁吗？故选CHello, my name is Bill. My last name is 68 . I'm twelve. Tm from America. Ihave some good 69 . They are Mike, Jack, Mary and Kate. We are in the same class.You can see 45 desks and 70 in our classroom. There is a big 71 on thewall. In the photo, you can see all the teachers and 72 of our class. Look! This isMr. Green. He is 73 English teacher. He is kind to us and he teaches English verywell. We all love him. Ha-ha! He is also my 74 . What an interesting thing! Myfavorite subject is not English. I like P.E. best. Look! You can 75 a soccer ball undera desk. That's mine, of course. I often 76 it with my friends after school on theschool playground. I love my 77 very much.68.A.WhiteB. GreenC.BlackD. Brown69.A.friendsB. sistersC. brothersD. parents70.A.watchesB. bedsc.chairsD. radios71.A.photoB. clockc.mapD. phone72.A.subjectsB.numbersc.ballsD. students73.A. hisB.yourc.ourD. their74.A. fatherB.motherc.sisterD. aunt75.A.meetB.seec.callD. buy76.A. findB. needc.meetD. play77. A. classB. familyC. roomD. name【 答案】68. B69. A70. C71. A72. D73. C74. A75. B76. D77. A【 分析】本文作者Bill介绍了自己和朋友的一些情况，和他的教室里的物品摆放，以及他爸爸是他们的英语老师等信息。

6 8 . 句意：我姓格林White怀特；Green格 林 ; Black布 莱 克 ; Brown布朗根据下文“This is Mr.Green...Ha-ha! He is also my...”可知格林先生是我的爸爸，因此可知我姓格林，故选Bo6 9 . 句意：我有一些好朋友friends 朋友；sisters 姐妹；brothers 兄弟；parents 父母根据下文“ They are Mike, Jack,Mary and Kate. We are in the same class.“我们在同一个班，可知应该是有一些好朋友，故选Ao7 0 . 句意：你可以看到我们教室里有45张课桌椅watches 手表；beds 床；chairs 椅 子 ; radios 收音机根据"You can see 45 desks and ...in our classroom.”在教室里能看到，应该是看到桌子和椅子，故选C7 1 . 句意：墙上有一张大照片photo照 片 ; clock钟 表 ; map地 图 ; phone根据后面的"In the photo”在照片里,可知是墙上有一张大照片，故选A。

7 2 . 句意：在照片中，你可以看到我们班所有的老师和学生subjects 学科；numbers 数字；balls 球；students 学生根据"you can see all the teachersand ... of our class.”能看见我们班老师和. . .，可知应该还有学生，故选D73 . 句意：他是我们的英语老师his他的；your你的、你们的；our我们的；their他们的根据“He is kind to us and heteaches English very well.”可知，他对我们很好，是我们的英语老师，故选C74 . 句意：他也是我的爸爸father爸 爸 ; mother妈妈；sister姐妹；aunt阿姨根据上文“This is Mr. Green.”这是格林先生，男性，可知应是我的爸爸，故选A75 . 句意：你可以看到桌子上有一个足球meet遇见；see看见；call打；buy买根据后面的“a soccer ball under a desk.”桌子上面的足球，可知应该是能看见，故选B76 . 句意：放学后我经常和我的朋友们在学校操场上玩find 发现；need 需要；meet 遇见；play 玩。

根据上文“You can … a soccer ball under adesk. Thafs mine, of course.”桌子上面有我的足球，可知应该是放学后我经常和朋友们在学校操场上玩，故选D77 . 句意：我爱我的班级class班级；family家庭；room房间；name名字根据全文都是介绍自己的班级，结合力love m y…. ” 可知应该是爱自己的班级，故选AHello, I am Jenny Brown. I have some nice 78 . Here are 79 of them.The first one is the photo of my family. Look! These are my grandparents. They have two80 、 my father and my uncle. This is my brother, Eric. He is only five years old. Myfriends are in the next photo. The two girls are Mary and Lucy. I go to school 81them every day. I am in Class 3 and they are in Class 9. We always 82 basketballafter school, Haha! What's in the last photo? Ifs Laifu, our dog.78. A. modelsB. phonesC. photos79. A. twoB. threeC. four80. A. daughtersB• sonsC. brothers81. A. forB. afterC. with82. A. playB. haveC. like【 答案】78. C79. B80. B81. C82. A【 导语】本文是一篇说明文，介绍了三张照片里的人物。

78 . 句意：我有一些不错的照片models 模型；phones ；photos 照片由“The first one is the photo of my family”可知，作者在介绍照片，故选C79 . 句意：这里有三张照片two 二；three 三； four 四由“The first one...My friends are in the next photo...What9s inthe last photo”可知，一共介绍了三张照片，故选B80 . 句意: 他们有两个儿子daughters 女儿；sons 儿子；brothers 兄弟由“my father and my uncle”可知，是有两个儿子，故选B81 . 句意：每天我和他们一起去上学for为了； after在. . .之后；with和由“I go to school ...them”，此处表达每天我和玛丽和露西一起去上学82 . 句意：放学后我们总是打篮球play玩；have有；like喜欢由后文basketball可知，此处表达打篮球This is Tianjin New Star Computer Company. Now we want a 83 assistant for sale. He isa young man 84 30-35. He should be 85 and helpful. He will 86 inCanada. He should 87 English 88 French well. Please send an 89to our company: newstarcc@ or send a 90 to us: 99 Binhai Road, Tianjin,310009. Our 91 number is 86-022-89562233.92 to join us.83. A.teacherB.workerC. managerD. player84. A. aboveB. onC. inD. between85. A. beautifulB. healthyC. oldD. pretty86. A. workB. flyC. comeD. make87. A.tellB. talkC. sayD. speak88. A. butB. orC. soD. then89. A.letterB. emailC. telephoneD. room90. A.letterB. emailC. telephoneD. room91. A.letterB. emailC. telephoneD. room92. A. Do youB. Would youC. PleaseD. Welcome【 答案】83. C84. D85. B86. A87. D88. B89. B90. A91. C92. D【 分析】这是一个电脑公司招聘经理的广告。

83 . 句意：我们想要一个销售经理助理A. teacher老师； B. worker I人； C. manager 经理； D. player 运动员；根据 This is Tianjin New StarComputer Company可知是经理；故选C84 . 句意：他是一个30-35的年轻人根据30-35可知是两者之间；故选D85 . 句意：他应该是健康的乐于助人的A. beautiful漂亮的； B. healthy 健康的； C. o ld 老的； D. pretty美丽的；根据文意可知是健康的；故选B86 . 句意：他将在加拿大工作根据Now we want a ] assistant for sale可知是在加拿大工作；故选A87 . 句意：他应该说英语或法语很好A. te ll告诉； B. talk一般为不及物动词，交谈，谈话，着重强调两者之间的谈话 C. sa y 说，通常指说话的内容 D.speak说，通常指说某种语言，故选D点睛：say/speak/tell/talk的区别：say说，通常指说话的内容，它的宾语可以是名词、代词可以是宾语从句，例如：He can say his name, speak强调说的动作，不强调说的内容，做及物动词时通常指说某种语言，例如：He can speak Chinese, talk 一般为不及物动词, 交谈，谈话, 着重强调两者之间的谈话，例如：She is talking with Lucy inEnglish, tell常做及物动词，意思是“ 讲，告诉” ，动词常跟双宾语，例如：He istelling the children a story.88 . 句意：他应该说英语或法语很好。

A. b u t 但是； B. o r 或者； C. s o 所以； D. then那么；根据句意故选C89 . 句意：请发送电子邮件到我们公司根据newstarcc@可知是电子邮件；故选B90 . 句意：或给我们寄信根据99 Binhai Road, Tianjin, 310009. 可知是寄信；故选A9 1 .句意：我们的号码是86-022-89562233.根据86-022-89562233可知是号码；故选C92 . 句意：欢迎加入我们A/B/C都不能直接接to； welcome to do sth欢迎做某事；故选 D点睛：根据前后文的语境，结合时态，语态，词性，短语，句型，词义辨析和主谓一致，选出正确的选项例如：小题9 句意：我们的号码是86-022-89562233.根据 86・022・89562233可知是号码；故选CMy mother has a clothes store in the city of Qingdao. It is 93 、 but she sells allkinds of children's clothes in 94 store. The 95 of the clothes are not very high,96 many parents like to come here and 97 new clothes for their children.This week, my mother has many sweaters at a great 98 . You can choose different99 like black, white, red and so on. For boys, the shoes for sports are cool. ]Q0Saturdays and Sundays, some hats and socks are only $5. You 101 come and have alook.102 is it? It's at No.98 Zhongshan Road.93. A. fineB. differentC. bigD. small94. A. myB.yourC. herD. his95. A. moneyB. setsC. pairsD. prices （ 价格）96. A. becauseB.soC. andD. but97. A. buyB. askC. sellD. send98. A. sportB. partyC. saleD. birthday99. A. colorsB. lessonsC. photosD. clubs100.A. OnB.InC.AtD.From101. A. willB.canC.needD.must102.A. WhenB.Whyc.WhatD.Where【 答案】93. D94. C95. D96. B97. A98. C99. A100. A101. B102. D【 导语】本文主要介绍了作者妈妈在青岛市中山路98号的服装店。

93 . 句意：它很小，但是她在商店里卖各种各样的童装fine 好 的 ; different 不同的；big 大 的 ; small 小的根据好ut she sells all kinds ofchildren's clothes”可知这里表示转折，说明店很小，故选D94 . 句意：它很小，但她在她的商店里卖各种各样的儿童服装my 我的；your 你的；her 她的；his 他的根据“My mother has a clothes store in the cityof Qingdao”可知指的是妈妈的店，应用her指代妈妈的，故选C95 . 句意：衣服的价格不是很高，所以很多父母喜欢来这里给他们的孩子买新衣服money钱；sets一套；pairs一双；prices价格根据“high”可知此处指的是价格，故选Do96 . 句意：衣服的价格不是很高，所以很多父母喜欢来这里给他们的孩子买新衣服because 因为；so 所 以 ; and 和 ; but 但是the clothes are not very high...manyparents like to come here '' 可知前后是因果关系，前因后果，用 s o ,故选B。

97 . 句意：衣服的价格不是很高，所以很多父母喜欢来这里给他们的孩子买新衣服buy 买；ask 问；sell 卖；send 送根据“new clothes for their children.”可知是给孩子买衣服，故选A9 8 .句意：这个星期，我妈妈有很多毛衣在大减价sport运动；party聚 会 ; sale出 售 ; birthday生日固定短语a great sale“ 大减价” ，故选Co99 . 句意：你可以选择不同的颜色，如黑色，白色，红色等colors颜色；lessons课程；photos照 片 ; clubs俱乐部根据"black, white, red”可知指的是颜色，故选A100 . 句意：在星期六和星期天， 一些帽子和袜子只卖5 美元O n后加具体的某一天；In后加某年某月某季节；A t后加具体时刻；From从根据''Saturdays and Sundays”可知应用时间介词o n ,故选A101 . 句意：你可以过来看看will 将要；can 能够；need 需要；must 必须根据“some hats and socks are only $5.Ye and have a look.”可知店里在做活动，周末你可以过来看看，故选B。

102 . 句意: 在哪里?When什么时候；Why为 什 么 ; What什么；Where在哪里根据"It's at No.98Zhongshan Road.”可知问的是地点，故选D完型填空Hello! My name is Tom. I in Huangdu Middle School. My school is not newbeautiful. My teachers and classmates are nice to me. I love___very much.Our first class is 8:00. We have four in the morning and three in the afternoon.We have some like English ,Chinese, math, art, but I don't like geography because it'snot v e r y . Do you think so?I have lunch with my friends at school. Then we go to the to read some books. Afterschool, we like____ basketball. I have a good__ — at school. I love my school103. A. isB. amC. are104. A. butB. andC. because105. A. theyB. theirC. them106. A. inB. atC. on107. A. lessonsB. lessonC. games108. A. teachersB. friendsC. subjects109. A. interestingB. difficultC. boring110. A. partyB. libraryC. school111. A. playB. playsC. to play112. A. timeB. morningC. Tuesday【 答案】103. B104. A105. C106. B107. A108. C109. A110. B111. C112. A【 分析】在该文中汤姆介绍了他所在的黄渡中学。

他的的学校不新但美丽他的老师和同学都对他很好他非常爱他们他在学校过得很开心103. B 考查动词be及语境理解句意：我在黄渡中学is 是，适用于第三人称单数；am 是，适用于第一人称单数；are是，适用于第二人称单数和所有的复数本句主语为I , 所以选B104. A 考查连词及语境理解句意：我的学校不新但是美丽but但是； and和；because因为前后之间是转折关系，所以选A105. C 考查人称代词及语境理解句意：我非常爱他们They主格，他们；their他们的；them宾格，他们所填词跟在及物动词之后，该用人称代词的宾格形式，所以选 Co106. B 考查介词及语境理解句意：我们的第一节课在8:00In在……里； a t 在；on在……上表示在某个时刻习惯用介词a t , 所以选B107. A 考查名词及语境理解句意：我们在上午有四节课和下午有三节lessons是lesson的复数形式；lesson课，功课；games游戏，比赛根据句意及而语境可知该选Ao108. C 考查名词及语境理解句意：我们上一些科目像英语，语文，数学，艺术teachers 老师；friends 朋友；subjects 科目。

根据 English ,Chinese, math, art 可知该选Co109. A 考查形容词及语境理解句意：但我不喜欢地理，因为它不是很有趣interesting有趣的；difficult困难的；boring无聊的根据句意结合语境可知该选A110. B 考查名词及语境理解句意：然后我们去图书馆读一些书party聚会；library图书馆；school学校根据句意结合语境可知该选B111. C 考查动词不定式及语境理解句 意 :放学后，我们喜欢打篮球play玩；plays是 play的一般现在时第三人称单数形式；to play是 play的动词不定式形式like to dosth喜欢做某事，所以选C112. A 考查名词及语境理解句意：我在学校过的很开心time时间；morning早晨；Tuesday星期二Have a good time玩得愉快，过得开心，是一个固定短语，所以选 Ao考点：日常生活类短文Joan is fourteen years old and she is a very 113 girl. At school she likes all her114 and 115 classmates all like her.Joan has a happy 116 . Her parents are teachers and she 117 them very much.Now it is 118 Sunday in May. Ifs Mother's Day. She 119 to do some things for hermother. She thinks over ( 仔 态 W 考虑) about it and has a good 120 .She cooks 121 for her mother at seven in the morning, then she washes all theclothes for family. 122 that she goes to the store and 123 some flowers and a (an)124 hat for her mother. Her mother is very 125 . 126 the afternoon, they have aparty with Joan's aunt and uncle. They play games and 127 TV. Everyone has a goodtime.113. A. niceB.bigC .badD. small114. A. parentsB. brothersC .friendsD. classmates115. A. sheB. herc.hersD. she's116. A. mapB. roomc.keyD. family117. A. enjoysB. tellsc.seesD. loves118. A. firstB.the firstc.secondD. the second119. A. wantsB. thinksc.saysD. takes120. A. jobB. ideac.boxD. bag121. A. afternoon tea B.breakfastc.lunchD. dinner122. A. BecauseB.Butc.AfterD. About123. A. buysB. sellsc.thanksD. watches124. A. busyB. relaxingc.redD. easy125. A. relaxingB. happyC. boringD. interesting126. A. InB.OnC. AtD. Of127. A. lookB.listenC・ hearD. watch【 答案】113. A114. D115. B116. D117. D118. D119. A120. B121. B122. C123. A124. C125. B126. A127. D【 分析】本文讲述了一个叫琼的小女孩，很爱她的父母，然后在母亲节决定为妈妈做点事，最后妈妈很开心的故事。

113 . 句意：琼十四岁了，她是一个非常好的女孩nice 好的；big 大 的 ; bad 坏的；small 小的根据“At school she likes all her...classmatesall like her.”可知琼是一个很好的女孩子，故选A114 . 句意：在学校她喜欢所有的同学，她的同学都喜欢她parents 父母；brothers 兄弟；friends 朋友；classmates 同学根据“At school”可知琼喜欢她的所有同学，故选D115 . 句意：在学校她喜欢所有的同学，她的同学都喜欢她she她；her她的，形容词性物主代词；hers她的，名词性物主代词；she， s 她是空处后有名词，所以用形容词性物主代词，故选B116 . 句意：琼有一个幸福的家庭map 地 图 ; room 房间；key 钥匙：family 家庭根据"Her parents are teachers andshe...hem very much”可知琼是有一个幸福的家庭，故选D117 . 句意：她的父母是老师，她非常爱他们enjoys享受；tells告诉；sees看到；loves爱。

根据"Joan has a happy...”可知琼应是很爱她的父母，故选D118 . 句意：现在是五月的第二个星期天first 第一个；the first 第一个；second 第二个；the second 第二个根据" It's Mother'sDay”可知母亲节在五月的第二天，序数词前一般加th e ,故选D119 . 句意：她想为她母亲做些事wants 想要；thinks 认为；says 说；takes 拿走根据”..to do some things fbr her mother”以及“She thinks over （ 仔细考虑） about it”可知她是想要为她妈妈做点事，故选A 120 . 句意：她仔细考虑了一下，有了一个好主意job工作；idea想 法 ; box盒子；bag包根据“ She thinks over （ 仔细考虑） about it ”可知她应是有一个好主意了，故选B121 . 句意：她早上七点给妈妈做早餐，然后她为家人洗所有的衣服afternoon tea 下午茶：breakfast 早餐；lunch 午餐；dinner 晚餐根据“at seven in themorning”可知做的是早餐，故选B。

122 . 句意：然后她去商店买了一些花和一顶红帽子给她妈妈Because因为；But但是；After在. . .之后；About关于空处前后两句在时间上是先后关系，故选Co123 . 句意：然后她去商店买了一些花和一顶红帽子给她妈妈buys 买；sells 卖；thanks 感谢；watches 观看根据“the store and...some flowers ”可知她去商店是为了买花，故选A124 . 句意：然后她去商店买了一些花和一顶红帽子给她妈妈busy忙碌的；relaxing放松的；red红色的；easy简单的根据常识结合选项可推断帽子应该是红色的，故选C125 . 句意: 她妈妈很高兴relaxing 放松的；happy 高兴 的 ; boring 无聊的；interesting 有趣的根据“she goes tothe store...some flowers and a （ an） ...hat for her mother.”可知她的妈妈是非常开心女儿给自己买礼物，故选B126 . 句意：下午，他们与琼的姑姑和叔叔举行聚会In在. . .里面；On在. . . . 上面；A t在；O f属于. . . . 。

固定短语in the afternoon"在下午” ，故选A1 2 7 .句意：他们玩游戏和看电视look＜； listen听；hear听 到 ; watch观看固定短语watch TV“ 看电视” ，故选DLast summer holiday, my family had a wonderful trip in the south of China.Ifs far from Beijing to Nanjing. So we went there by 128 . It took us about twohours to get there. We had an exciting day. The 129 day, we went to Wuxi andSuzhou. The houses there are along the river and women always 130 clothes on thebank （ 河岸） . On the 131 day, we went to Hangzhou.There we went to visit the west Lake. Ifs very beautiful 132 the water is veryclean. As we all know, Hangzhou is famous for silk and 133 . So we bought somebeautiful silk and famous tea. Finally, we visited Shanghai. We also 134 theOriental Pearl Radio & TV Tower （ 东方明珠广播电视塔） . When we stood at the top of thetower, we 135 the whole city. At night, we stayed in a 136 with 25 floors.We were all very excited that evening.This trip made us very happy. I thought the time was too 137 but we had toleave. We expected （ 期待） the next trip.128. A. planeB. busC. bikeD. ship129. A. otherB. anotherC. nextD. every130. A. sellB. seeC. buyD. wash131. A. secondB. thirdC. fourthD. fifth132. A. soB. ifC. butD. and133. A. waterB. teaC. coffeeD. milk134. A. visitedB. lookedC. gotD. arrived135. A. likedB. walkedC. sawD. flew136. A. libraryB. hospitalC. schoolD. hotel137. A. shortB. longC. muchD. many【 答案】128. A129. C130. D131. B132. D133. B134. A135. C136. D137. A【 分析】本文是一篇记叙文，主要讲去年暑假作者与家人去南方度假。

他们去了南京、无锡、苏州、杭州和上海，整个行程他们都很开心128 . 句意：所以我们乘坐飞机去那里plane 飞机；bus 公交车；bike 自行车; ship 船根据"It's far from Beijing to Nanjing.“可推知我们乘飞机到达那里129 . 句意：第二天，我们去了无锡和苏州other其他的；another另一个；next另一个；every每一个通常在介绍旅程时按照时间顺序结合选项可知“the next day ”（ 接下来的一天）符合语境130 . 句意：那边的房子都是沿河而建并且女人在河边洗衣服sell卖：see看见；buy买；wash洗根据”...clothes on the bank”可知是在河边洗衣服131 . 句意：第三天，我们去了杭州second第二；third第三；fourth第四：fifth第五根据第二空“the next day”可知此处表示第三天132 . 句意：西湖很美，且水很干净so 因此：if如果；but但是；and并且空处前后内容之间是并列关系，应用and故选 D133 . 句意：我们都知道，杭州以丝绸和茶而著名water 水；tea 茶 ; coffee 咖啡；milk 牛奶。

根据后面一句“So we bought some beautifulsilk and famous tea.”可知杭州以丝绸和茶叶而出名134 . 句意：我们也参观了东方明珠广播电视塔visited 参观；looked 看；got 得 到 ; arrived 到达根据“we visited Shanghai”以及“also”可知此处表示我们也参观了东方明珠广播电视塔故选Ao135 . 句意：我们看见了整座城市liked 喜 欢 ; walked 步行；saw 看见；flew 飞根据"When we stood at the top of thetower”可知站在塔顶可以看见整个城市136 . 句意：晚上，我们待在一个25层楼的宾馆library图书馆；hospital医院；school学校；hotel宾馆作者与家人在外旅行，晚上应住在宾馆137 . 句意：我认为时间太短了，我们不得不离开short 短的：long 长的；much 多；many 许多根据"We were all very excited thatevening.”"This trip made us very happy.”及 but we had to leave 可知作者的这次旅行很愉快，所以作者觉得时间太短了。

故选AIn Britain （ 英国） ， winter is not very cold 138 summer is not very hot. There isnot a great 139 between summer and winter. 140 is this?Britain has a warm winter and a cool summer because it is an island （ 岛） country. Inwinter the sea is wanner than the land. The winds from the sea 141 warm air toBritain. In summer the sea is cooler than the land. The winds from the sea bring 142air to Britain.The winds from the west blow 143 Britain all the year. They blow from thesouthwest （ 西南部） . They are wet （ 湿的） 如4 . They bring rain to Britain all the year.Britain has 145 rain all the year. The west of Britain is wetter than the east （ 东部） . Thewinds must blow over the highland （ 高原） in the west. They drop more rain there. The east ofBritain is drier （ 更干） than the west.The four seasons are 146 three months long. Winter is in December, January andFebruary. Spring lasts 147 March to May. Summer is in June, July and August. Fall isin September, October and November.138. A. orB. butC. and139.A. differenceB. differentC. differences140.A. WhatB.WhyC. How141. A. carryB. takeC. bring142.A. coolB. hotC. warm143. A. overB.underC. at144.A. rainB. rainsC. winds145.A. manyB.a lotC. a lot of146.A. everyB. otherC. all147. A. fromB.inC. at【 答案】138. C139. A140. B141. C142. A143. A144. C145. C146. C147. A【 导语】本文是科普文，介绍了英国的气候特点及成因和四季的划分。

1 3 8 .句意：在英国，冬天不太冷，夏天不太热or或 者 , 表 选 择 ; but但是，表 转 折 ; and和，表并列0 awinter is not very cold”和“summer is not very hot.”是两个并列的句子，需用and连接，故选Co1 3 9 .句意：夏天和冬天没有很大的区别difference区别，名词；different不同的，形容词；differences区别，名词复数形式a修饰名词的单数形式，故选A140 . 句意：这是为什么呢？What什么，问事情；W hy为什么，问原因；How怎样，问方式根据下文“Britain hasa warm winter and a cool summer because it is an island （ 岛） country”可知是问原因，故选Bo141 . 句意：海风给英国带来了温暖的空气carry携带；take拿走；bring带来根据"warm air to Britain”可知给英国带来了温暖的空气，故选C142 . 句意：海风给英国带来凉爽的空气cool 凉爽的；hot 热的；warm 温暖的。

根据“In winter ... warm air to Britain"及"Insummer…air to Britain”可知，冬天将暖空气带到英国，夏天就是将凉快的空气带到英国，故选A143 . 句意：来自西方的风一年到头都吹在英国上空over在. . .之上；under在. . . . 之下；at在 （ 某处） 根据“blow…Britain”可知是在英国上空刮过，故选A144 . 句意：它们是湿风rain雨；rains雨；winds风根据上文“The winds fi*om the west...”可知吹来的是风，故选 C°145 . 句意：英国一年到头雨水很多many许多的，修饰复数名词；a lot很多，副词修饰动词；a lo to f许多，修饰复数名词或不可数名词rain是不可数名词，应用a lot o f修饰，故选C146 . 句意：四季都是三个月长every每一个；olher其他的；all全都，用于三者及以上根据“The four seasons are ...three months long”可知，四个季节都是三个月长，应填a l l ,故选C147 . 句意：春天从三月持续到五月。

from从；in后接某年、某月或某季节；a t后接具体时刻根据“March to May”可知，此处用from ... to ...表示“ 从. . .到. . . . "，故选Ao从每小题所给的三个选项中， 选出可以填入空白处的最佳答案My family go camping （ 野营） often. We drive to the same camping place every148 . In the camping place, there's a small river. We go boating on the river a lot.The water is clean. There^e lots of water birds singing songs. It?s just great to be on thewater. When we come to the river, we try our best to talk 149 so as not to scare （ 吓到） the birds.150 we often see some nasty （ 不好的） things. Sometimes kids use theslingshots （ 弹弓） to shoot the birds. They have a good laugh （ 大笑） when the birds151 from the trees. When my parents see this, they 152 row the boat tothe kids at once. Then my parents tell 153 they can't hurt the birds. If they're not154 to the birds, one day all the birds will go away.We 155 the place so much that we want to come back every week. So, we needto keep it great.148. A. dayB. weekC. year149. A. quietlyB. happilyC. noisily150. A. ButB. SoC. Or151. A. come backB. fall downC. get up152. A. seldomB. neverC. often153. A. itB. usC. them154. A. friendlyB. closeC. dangerous155. A. studyB. findC. love【 答案】148. B149. A150. A151. B152. C153. C154. A155. C【 导语】本文作者讲述野营之旅。

作者和父母每周都开车去同一个露营地野营，148 . 句意：. 我们每周都开车去同一个露营地，他们热爱那个地方，爱护那儿的鸟儿，劝导捕鸟的不文明行为day 天；week 周；year 年；根据下文“we want to come back every week”想要每周都来；可知此处指“ 每 周 故 选 B149 . 句意：当我们来到河边时，我们尽量轻声地说话，以免惊吓鸟儿quietly 安静地; happily 幸运地；noisily 吵闹地; 根据"so as not to scare the birds”可知此处指“ 小声 说 话 以 免 吓 到 鸟 儿 故 选 A150 . 句意：但我们经常看到一些令人不悦的事情But但是；S因此；O r或者；上文“ 我们小声说话以免吓到鸟儿” ；根据下文"Sometimes kids use the slingshots to shoot the birds.”可知此处指“ 我们小声说话以免吓至I]鸟儿，但也有令人不悦的事情发生” ，上下文含有转折意义151 . 句意：当鸟儿从树上掉下来时，他们笑得很开心come back回来；fall down落下；get up起床；根据上文“ 有时孩子们用弹弓射杀小鸟”可知此处指“ 鸟儿从树上掉下来” 。

故 选 B152 . 句意：当我的父母看到这种情况时，他们经常会立刻把船划向孩子们seldom很少；never绝不；often经常；根据上文“ 我们小声说话以免吓到鸟儿' ' 可知，父母是爱鸟人士，看到孩子射杀鸟儿时，他们会经常前往劝诫孩子153 . 句意：然后我父母告诉他们，不能伤害鸟it它；us我们；them他们；根据上文“ 作者的父母看到孩子们射杀鸟儿，把船划向孩子' ' 可知此处指“ 告诉孩子们不能伤害鸟儿” ，用 them指代kids154 . 句意：如果他们对鸟不友好，总有一天所有的鸟都会离开friendly友好的；close亲近的；dangerous危险的；根据上文“ 有时孩子们用弹弓射杀小鸟” 可知此处指“ 对鸟儿不友好工故选A155 . 句意：我们非常喜欢这个地方，每周都想过来所以，我们需要保持它的美好study 研究；find 找到；love 爱；根据下文“that we want to come back every week.”可知此处指“ 喜 欢 这 个 地 方 故 选 C阅读下面短文，从短文后所给的A、B、C、D 四个选项中选出能填入相应空白处的最佳选项When I was small child, I usually watched my elder sister writing English words. I was156 in the language, so I asked her to teach me English. A few days later, I could157 easy English sentences to talk with her.In fact, this 158 of learning English gave me a lot of 159 . 1 did wellin English later. I even got full marks （ 满分） in the first English exam in junior high school.This made me very 160 in our school. At the same time, my English teacher MissYang asked me to 161 the English competition （ 比赛） and I won the first prize. Atthe age of 15,1 became a senior high school 162 . There I met Mr. Chen, my Englishteacher. What he did helped me understand English better. Three years later, I went to college.There I learned more ways to make my English better, and 163 , 1 even had noproblems in talking with foreigners.English is not ]64 to learn. If you have an interest in it, just follow yourteachers and 165 as much as possible. Then you will find it interesting to learn it!156. A. interestedB. famousC. busyD. strict157. A. spendB. useC. teachD. follow158. A. menuB. matchC. wayD. problem159. A. worryB. workC. moneyD. fun160. A. popularB. dangerousC. strangeD. afraid161. A. light upB. join inC. look afterD. work out162. A. engineerB. driverC. studentD. teacher163. A. unluckilyB. probablyC. sadlyD. finally164. A. freeB. importantC. differentD. difficult165. A. practiseB. haveC. provideD. catch【 答案】156. A157. B158. C159. D160. A161. B162. C163. D164. D165. A【 分析】本文中作者讲了自己学习英语成功的经历。

156 . 句意：我对这门语言很感兴趣，所以我请她教我英语interested 感兴趣的；famous 出名的；busy 忙的；strict 严厉的根据"so I asked her toteach me English.”可知，此处是说对这门学科感兴趣，故选A157 . 句意：几天后，我可以用简单的英语句子和她说话了spend 花费；use 使用；teach 教；follow 跟随根据“...easy English sentences to talkwith her”可知，此处是use sth to do sth“ 用某物去做某事” ，表达“ 用简单的英语句子和她说话” 158 . 句意：事实上，这种学习英语的方式给了我很多乐趣menu 菜单；match 比赛；way 方法；problem 问题根据空后“of learning English”可知，此处是说学习英语的方式159 . 句意：事实上，这种学习英语的方式给了我很多乐趣worry 担 心 ; work 工作；money 金钱；fun 乐趣根据"I did well in English later.”结合选项可知，此处是说“ 给了我很多乐趣” 。

故选D160 . 句意：这使我在学校很受欢迎popular受欢迎的; dangerous危险的；strange奇怪的; afraid害怕的根据“I even gotfull marks （ 满分） in...”可知，此处是说我在学校很“ 受欢迎” 161 . 句意：同时，我的英语老师杨老师让我参加英语比赛，我获得了一等奖light up 照亮；join in 加入；look after 照看；work out 算出根据“...the Englishcompetition （ 比赛） and I won the first prize.”可知，此处是说参加英语比赛1 6 2 .句意：在 15岁的时候，我成为了一名高中生engineer 工程师；driver 司机；student 学生；teacher 老师根据空前“a senior highschool”可知，此处是说“ 高中生” 1 6 3 .句意：最后，我甚至与外国人交谈都没有问题unluckily 不幸地；probably 或 许 ; sadly 伤心地；finally 最后根据“I even had noproblems in talking with foreigners”可知，这是最后的事情。

故选 D1 6 4 .句意：英语不难学free 自由的；important 重要的；different 不同的；difficult 困难的根据“If you have aninterest in it...”及作者的成功的经历可知，此处是说英语不难学1 6 5 .句意：如果你对它感兴趣，就跟随你的老师，尽可能多地练习practise 练习；have 有；provide 提供；catch 抓住根据“ …as much as possible'',此处是说学习英语，所以应该是“ 尽 可 能 多 地 练 习 故 选 A°阅读下面的短文，然后从短文后各题所给的A、B、C 三个选项中，选出最佳选项Yesterday was Sunday. The 166 was hot. "Let's go to the beach!” Dad said toPolly. Polly was very happy because she could 167 there. Polly went to the beach168 Mom and Dad. When they 169 there, they 170 manypeople on the beach. Some people swam in the water 171 some played with a beachball. Polly ran happily. "Let's swim!^^ she said to 172 . Polly and Dad were173 and thirsty （ 口渴的） after swimming. They drank some water and had a rest.Mom 174 them some ice cream. "It is 1 7 5 ! Thank you, Mom,“ saidPolly. Then Polly 176 some beautiful shells （ 贝壳） on the beach. When it becamedark （ 天黑） , Polly and[77 parents decided to 178. On their wayhome, they went to a 179 and had dinner there. "Today is 180 r saidPolly.166.A. dishB.foodC. weather167.A. singB. swimC. dance168.A. withB. toC. for169.A. gotB. livedC. left170.A. lookedB. sawC ・ watched171.A. orB.ifC. and172.A. DadB.BrotherC. Mom173.A. scaredB.tiredC. lucky174.A. madeB. boughtC. found175. A. terribleB. cheapC. delicious176.A. pickedB. drewC. grew177.A. hisB.theirC. her178.A. leaveB. comeC. stay179.A. bankB. restaurantC. library180.A. terribleB. boringC , great【 答案】166. C167. B168. A169. A170. B171. C172. A173. B174. B175. C176. A177. C178. A179. B180. C【 导语】本文讲述了波莉和父母在海滩上度过了一个愉快的星期天。

166 . 句意：天气很热dish 菜肴；food 食物；weather 天气根据“hot”并结合下一句"Let's go to the beach!”可知，此处指天气热167 . 句意：波莉很高兴，因为她可以在那里游泳sing唱歌；swim游泳；dance跳舞根据"Let's go to the beach!”可知，去海边可以游泳故选Bo168 . 句意：波莉和爸爸妈妈去了海滩with 和；to 向，朝；for 为了根据“Polly went to the beach...Mom and Dad”可知，此处指和爸爸妈妈去海滩169 . 句意：当他们到达那里时，他们看见海滩上有很多人got 到达；lived 居住；left 离开结合上一句"Polly went to the beach… Mom and Dad.”可知他们去了海滩，此处指他们到达了那里170 . 句意：当他们到达那里时，他们看见海滩上有很多人looked看，强调动作：saw看到，强调结果；watched观看，强调过程根据“they...many people on the beach”可知，他们看到海滩上有很多人，强调的是结果。

故选 B171 . 句意：一些人在水里游泳，一些人在玩沙滩球or 或 者 ; if 如 果 ; and 和根据“Some people swam in the water…some played with abeach ball.”可知，前后为并列的句子，应用连词and连接172 . 句意：“ 我们去游泳吧！ ” 她对爸爸说Dad爸爸；Brother兄弟：Mom妈妈根据" Polly and Dad were...”可知，波莉是在跟爸爸说话173 . 句意：波莉和爸爸游泳后又累又渴scared害怕的；tired疲劳的，累的；lucky幸运的根据"Polly and Dad were… andthirsty （ 口渴的） after swimming.”可知，游泳后应该是又累又渴的174 . 句意：妈妈给他们买了一些冰激凌made 做；bought 买；found 发现根据“Mom... them some ice cream”, 妈妈给他们买了冰激凌，buy sb. sth.“ 给某人买某物" 175 . 句意：很美味！terrible 糟糕的；cheap 便宜的；delicious 美味的。

结合上一句 ''Mom... them some icecream.”可知，此处指冰激凌很美味176 . 句意：然后波莉在海滩上捡了一些美丽的贝壳picked 捡；drew 画 ; grew 生长根据"Then Polly… some beautifiil shells （ 贝壳） on thebeach.”可知，波莉在海滩上捡了 一些美丽的贝壳177 . 句意：天黑时，波莉和她的父母决定离开his他的；Iheir他们的；her她的主语是“Polly”，女孩应用形容词性物主代词her故选 Co178 . 句意：天黑时，波莉和她的父母决定离开leave离开；come来；stay停留根据"On their way home”可知，他们决定离开故选Ao179 . 句意：在他们回家的路上，他们去了 一家餐馆并在那里吃了晚饭bank银行；restaurant餐馆；library图书馆根据"had dinner”可知，应该是去餐馆吃饭180 . 句意：今天很棒!terrible糟糕的；boring无聊的；great美妙的，好极了的结合上文可知，他们度过了美好的一天Look at ⑻ bedroom. 182 Tony's. There is a piano in it. Tony can183 the piano. There is a computer 184 the desk. The computer is very new.There 185 some books on the desk. You can 186 some pens on it, too.187 that under the desk? It's a football. On the chair 188 some bags. Tonyoften does 189 homework in the room. Tony's father and mother are 190 . Theyteach English in a school. Where 191 they come from? England. Tony has a sister.192 name is Kate Smith. Smith is her 193 name. She is only five,194 she can draw pictures well. Tony likes Kate 195 .181. A. aB. anC. theD. /182. A. it'sB. ItC. ItsD. It's183. A. buyB. likeC. speakD. play184. A. underB. inC. behindD. on185. A. beB. amC. isD. are186. A. lookB. look atC. seeD. watch187. A. Who'sB. What'sC. Where'sD. How's188. A. there'sB. isC. theyYeD. are189. A. herB. she'sC. hisD. he's190. A. doctorsB. workersC. managersD. teachers191. A. areB. doC. canD. does192. A. HerB. SheC. She'sD. His193. A. firstB. givenC. ChineseD. family194. A. andB. butC. /D. how195. A. very niceB. very goodC. very bigD. very much【 答案】181. C182. D183. D184. D185. D186. C187. B188. D189. C190. D191. B192. A193. D194. B195. D【 分析】本文向我们介绍了托尼的房间布局和家人的信息。

181 .句 意 :看这个卧室a 不定冠词表泛指，用于辅音音素开头的词前；an不定冠词表泛指，用于元音音素开头的词前；the定冠词表特指；/ 零冠词此处特指要看的房间，所以用定冠词th e ,故选 C182 .句 意 :它是托尼的il's它是；It它；Its它的；I * 它是此处用于句中作主语和谓语，指代前句中的“ bedroom”表单数，用于句首需大写首字母，故选D183 . 句意：托尼能弹钢琴buy买；like喜欢；speak说 ; play弹/ 玩根据其后“the piano”可知, 此处表示“ 弹钢琴” , 用 p la y ,故选D184 . 句意：书桌上有一台电脑under在. . .下；in在. . . . 中；behind在. . . . 后；on在. . . . 上根据后句“ …some penson it, too.“可知，是在书桌上, 故选D185 . 句意：有一些书在书桌上be动词原形；am 主语是I； is主语是第三人称/ 单数；are主语是第二人称/ 复数此处是“there be”句型，主语是“some books”表复数，故选D186 . 句意：你也可以在上面看到一些钢笔。

look看起来；look a t看；see看见；watch观看此处指看见的内容，所以用s e e ,故选 C187 . 句意：书桌下的那个是什么？Who's谁 是 ; WhaCs什么是；Where's哪里；Howk怎么根据下句是fs afbotball."可知，此处在询问“ 是什么" ，故选B188 . 句意：一些包在椅子上there's有；is是；they're它们是：are主语是第二人称/ 复数本句是倒装句，此处作谓语，主语"some bags”表复数，其后be动词应用are189 . 句意：托尼经常在房间里做他的家庭作业her她/ 她的；sheb她 是 ; his他的；heb他是此处指代“Tony”, 是男性，此处指的是“ 他的his”，故选C190 . 句意：托尼的父亲和母亲是教师doctors 医生；workers 工人；managers 经理；teachers 老师根据"They teach English ina school.”可知，他们在学校教英语，所以是老师，故选D191 . 句意：他们来自哪里？are是；do助动词原形：can能；does助动词三单本句谓语动词是“come fiwn”, 疑问句需用助动词帮忙，主语“they”表复数，所以用d o ,故选B。

192 . 句意：她的名字是凯特・ 史密斯Her她/ 她的；She她；She's她是；His他的根据“Tony has a sister.”可知，此处指托尼妹妹的名字，是女性，作定语修饰其后的名词“name"，所以用形容词性物主代词her,故选Ao193 . 句意：史密斯是她的姓first第一；given给予的；Chinese中文的；family家庭的根据“Kate Smith”和常识可知，外国人的姓在后，所以“Smith”是姓，故选D194 . 句意：她只有五岁，但是她画画很好and和；but但是；how怎么分析前后两句话，构成转折关系，可用并列连词but连接，故选B195 . 句意: 托尼非常喜欢凯特very nice非常好；very good非常好；very big非常大；very much非常此处用于句中修饰动词"likes”, 表示“ 非常” ，故选DDear daddy,Hey! How's everything 196 ? It's been so many days since you went to Wuhan.Do you still 197 the day before you left? I remember I saw the luggage （ 行李）inyour bedroom. I asked you, "Are you going to leave 198 business?” You smiled andput your hand on my head, saying JTm just tidying up some clothes.^^Later that night, I learned that you and mom had asked to 199 to Wuhan andwere waiting for a phone call. At that moment, I hoped 200 of you would get the call.201 , your phone still rang. I almost cried out, as if I were going to Wuhan myself.The next morning, I got 202 early. During breakfast, you smiled and asked me ifI 203 miss you. I pretended （ 假装）it was no big 204 and said, “I can sendyou a message whenever I miss you.”When you were leaving, I waved （ 挥手）to you 205 I couldn't see youanymore. Tears flowed down my face. I later realized it was Lantern Festival. I wrote down“Waiting for you to come back" in my notebook. I knew the people of Wuhan needed you206 than I did.Al night, mom sent me some photos of you and the rest of the medical team. I found youin the photos 207 . I pointed you out and shouted, €tHey, this is my daddy!” I was soproud of you!After you left, I paid more attention 208 the battle （ 战役）against the newcoronavirus （ 冠状病毒）. I wondered whether you would take good care of 209 .Daddy, remember to exercise and get 210 rest.We all miss you every day. I love you, my superhero, forever and ever.KathyFeb 15, 2020196. A. goB. goingC. to go197. A. rememberB. realizeC. forget198. A. toB. onC. for199. A. sendB. sentC. be sent200. A. neitherB. bothC. either201. A. ButB. HoweverC. And202. A. onB. offC. up203. A. wouldB. willC. shall204. A. smileB. dealC. laugh205. A. unlessB. ifC. until206. A. manyB.muchC. more207. A. just nowB.at onceC. at last208. A. toB. ontoC. into209. A. yourB. yourselfC. yours210. A. lotB. littleC. enough【 答案】196. B197. A198. B199. C200. A201. B202. C203. A204. B205. C206. C207. B208. A209. B210. C【 分析】文章大意：本文是Kathy写给去武汉抗击新型冠状病毒肺炎的爸爸的一封信，信中写了爸爸妈妈去武汉前后Kathy的心理变化，并表达了爸爸离开之后自己的思念之情。

196 . 句意: 一切都好吗？go进展，进行go动词原形；going动词的现在分词或动名词；to go动词的不定式结合题干“How，s e v e ry th in g ? ” 可知be动词与动词现在分词构成现在进行时故选Bo197 . 句意：还记得你离开的前一天吗？remember 记得；realize 意识到；forget 忘记根据下文“I remember I saw the luggage inyour bedroom.”讲自己记得的事情，可推出此处是问爸爸是否记得，用 remember符合题意故选Ao198 . 句意：你要出差吗？to 朝 , 向 ；on用于说明活动或状态; for为了根据上文“I remember I saw the luggagein your bedroom.”提到行李，可推出问是否要出差，on business出差199 . 句意：那天晚上，我得知你和妈妈已经要求被派往武汉，正在等一个send派遣send动词原形：sent动词过去式；be sent动词的被动式从句中主语“youand mom”与动词send之间是动宾关系，此处用被动式be sent。

故选C,200 . 句意：我希望你们俩都不会接到neither两者都不; both两者都；either两 者 之 根 据 下 文 “your phone still rang”讲到依旧响了，可推出此处是说希望两人都不会接到，用 neither符合题意故选Ao201 . 句意：然而，你们的铃依旧响了But但是；However然而；And和Kathy希望不要响但未能如愿，句意出现转折，且空后有逗号隔开，用 However符合题意202 . 句意：第二天早上，我起得很早get on上车；get off下车；get up起床根据下文“During breakfast”可推出此处是说起床很早203 . 句意：早餐时，你微笑着问我是否会想你would将会；will将会；shall将根据题干中“asked if I ____miss you”可知主句是一般过去时，主过从必过，BC两项都构成一般将来时，此处用would构成过去将来时故选 Ao204 . 句意：我假装没什么大不了的，然后说：……smile微笑；big deal重要的事；laugh笑根据题干中“it was no bi g" 可知此处用no big deal表示“ 没什么大不了“ 。

故选B205 . 句意：你走的时候，我向你挥手，直到看不见为止unless除非；if如果；until直到. . .为止根据下文“Tears flowed down my face.”可知Kalhy舍不得爸爸，由此可知送别时会一直挥手，直到看不见对方，用 until引导时间状语从句206 . 句意：我知道武汉的人民比我更需要你many许多；much许多，非常；more更根据空后“than”可知此处要用比较级more表示需要的程度207 . 句意：我一下子就在照片里找到了你just now 刚才；at once 立亥ij； at last 最后根据下文“I pointed you out and shouted”及常识可知是立刻就找到了爸爸208 . 句意：你走后，我更加关注抗击新冠病毒的战役to对于，关于；onto朝向，面向；into进入根据题干中“paid more attention thebattle”可知此处用固定搭配pay attention to 表示“ 关 注 故 选 A209 . 句意：我怀疑你会不会照顾好自己your你的，形容词性物主代词；yourself你自己，反身代词；yours你的，名词性物主代词。

根据主语you可知此处是说怀疑爸爸会不会照顾好自己，用反身代词符合题意210 . 句意：爸爸，记得要运动，要休息好lot大量，许多，其后不直接跟名词；little极少；enough足够的根据上下文可知Kathy爱自己的爸爸，应该是提醒他要有充足的睡眠，用 enough符合题意Look! This is a 211 of our class. The woman 212 a blue coat is ourEnglish teacher, Miss Wang. She is a good teacher. She has a round face and long blond hair.213 mouth is small. The boy 214 to Miss Wang is Jim. He is thirteen. He is215 English boy. He can not speak Chinese at all. We often help 216 with hisChinese. The girls are Lily and Lucy. They are 12 217 old. Their mother works in ourschool 218 . If you want to borrow some book, you can 219 her for help. Ourclassroom is not very big, 220 it is very clean and nice. I like my class and I like myschool, too.211. A. photoB. schoolC .familyD. map212. A. onB.inC .forD. with213. A. YourB.Hersc.HisD. Her214. A. nearB. nextc.underD. behind215. A. theB. /c.anD. a216. A. himB. hec.hisD. you217. A. agesB. agec.yearD. years218. A. classB. classroomc.libraryD. room219. A. askB. comec.haveD. think220. A. becauseB.soc.andD. but【 答案】211. A212. B213. D214. B215. C216. A217. D218. C219. A220. D【 分析】本文以一张照片的形式介绍了教室的情况，英语老师的外貌，Jim 的个人信息，Lily和 Lucy的个人和家庭信息。

211 . 句意：这是一张我们教室的照片photo照片；school学校；family家庭；map地图下文是在介绍照片里的人物信息，aphotoo『一张. . .的照片“ ，故选A212 . 句意：穿着一件蓝色外套的女人是我们的英语老师on在……上；in 穿某种颜色的衣物；for为了； with伴随此空表示“ 穿着蓝色外套” ，用 in+某种颜色的衣物，表示“ 穿……” ，故选B213 . 句意：她的嘴巴很小your你的；hers她的；his他的；her她/ 她的此空指代前文提到的Miss W ang,女性，此空修饰名词m outh,要用形容词性物主代词h e r,故选D214 . 句意：在王老师旁边的那个男孩是Jimnear在. . .附 近 ; next靠近；under在. . . . 下 面 ; behind在. . . . 后面根据“Theboy...to Miss Wang is Jim”可知，Jim在王老师的旁边，next to 表示" 紧邻” ，故选B215 . 句意：他是一名英国男孩the定冠词，表特指；/ 零冠词；an表泛指，用于以元音音素开头的单词前；a 表泛指，用于以辅音音素开头的单词前。

此处表示“ 一名英国男孩“ ，表泛指，且 English是以元音音素开头的单词，故选C216 . 句意：我们经常帮助他学习中文him他，人称代词宾格；he他，人称代词主格；his他的，物主代词；you你，人称代词宾格/ 主格根据“He can not speak Chinese at all”可知，是帮助" 他' ' 学习中文，动词help后接人称代词宾格，故选A217 . 句意：她 们 12岁ages年龄，复数名词；age年龄，单数名词；year年纪，单数名词；years年纪，复数名词表达年龄用基数词+year(s)+okl, 12岁就是“12 years old"，故选D0218 . 句意：她们的妈妈在我们学校图书馆工作class 教室；classroom 教室；library 图书馆；room 房间根据"If you want to borrowsome book”可知，图书馆是借书的地方，故选C219 . 句意：你可以向她寻求帮助ask问；come来；have有；think认为固定搭配：ask sb fbr help”向某人寻求帮助” ，固定短语220 . 句意：我们的教室不是非常大，但它非常干净和漂亮。

because 因为；so 所以；and 和；but 但是根据句意可知，“Our classroom is not verybig”与"it is very clean and nice”在句意上是转折关系，故选DoThis year's Dragon Boat Festival falls 221 Jun 14. People celebrate （ 庆祝）theday to remember the famous poet Qu Yuan. It is a story about a poet from over 2,000 years222 . Qu Yuan jumped into a 223 for his love of country. People rowed boatson the river to try to look for him. Now dragon boat racing is part of the holiday. Watchingthe racing is very 224 . A lot of people like to 225 the racing with their familiesand friends. The boats are beautiful. Their prows （ 船头）look like dragon 226 . Theirtails （ 尾巴）look like dragon tails. On the boat, some people row the boat and some peoplebeat a gong （ 锣） and a drum （ 鼓）. One of 227 is the helmsman （ 舵手）.Thereare some 228 about the racing. People need to know the rules before joining the race.Dragon boat races are popular in the 229 of China. In Guangzhou, some dragonboats are hundreds of years old. There is a boat 230 Renwei. It is over 400 hundredyears old. People clean and repair （ 修理） it every year before the race.221 . A. at B. in C. on222. A. agoB. beforeC. later223. A. poolB. lakeC. river224. A. expensiveB. excitingC. different225. A. watchB. joinC. make226. A. headsB. handsC. mouths227. A. theyB. themC. their228. A. waysB. hostsC. rules229. A. southB. eastC. west230. A. playedB. studiedC. named【 答案】221. C222. A223 . C224. B225. A226. A227. B228. C229. A230. C【 导语】本文主要介绍了中国传统的端午节和龙舟比赛的相关内容。

221 . 句意：今年的端午节在6 月 14号a t在；in在. . .里面；on在. . . . 上面在具体的某一天要用介词o n ,故选C222 . 句意：这是一个关于2000多年前一位诗人的故事ago 以前；before 在. . .以前；later 后来根据"It is a story about a poet from over 2,000years” 结合语境可知，是 2000多年以前的故事，故选A223 . 句意：屈原因为热爱国家而跳进河里pool 水池；lake 湖；river 河根据"People rowed boats on the ri ver”可知，是跳进河里故选Co224 . 句意：观看比赛是非常激动人心的expensive 昂贵的；exciting 激动人心的；different 与众不同的根据“A lot of people liketo watch the racing with their families and friends.“结合语境可知，观看比赛是非常激动人心的225 . 句意：很多人喜欢和自己的家人朋友一起看比赛watch 观看；join 加入；make 制作。

根据“Watching the racing is very exciting.”可知此处是观看比赛226 . 句意：他们的船头看起来像龙头heads 头；hands 手 ; mouths 嘴根据“Their tails （ 尾巴）look like dragon tails.”可知，船头像龙头，故选A227 . 句意：他们中的一个人是舵手they他们；them他们；their他们的分析句子结构可知此处缺少o f的宾语，所以要用them代指前文的people,故选B228 . 句意：关于比赛有一些规则ways 方式；hosts 主人；rules 规则根据“People need to know the rules”可知此处是规则，故选C229 . 句意: 龙舟比赛在中国的南方很有名south南；east东；west西，根据“In Guangzhou”，可知此处是在中国的南方，故选Ao230 . 句意：有一艘船叫“ 仁威二played扮演；studied研究；named命名，结合语境可知，这里说的是有一艘叫仁威的历史很久的船，named此处作后置定语修饰b o a t,故选CThe Greens 231 at 87 King Street. In the morning, Mr. Green goes to work andthe children go to 232 . Their father takes 233 to school every day. Mrs.Green stays at home every day. She does the housework. She always eats her lunch at234 . In the afternoon, she usually sees her friends. They often drink 235together. In the evening, the children come home 236 school. They237 home early. Mr. Green comes home from work but he reaches home238 . At night, the children always do their homework 239 they go tobed. Mr. Green enjoys 240 newspapers, but sometimes he and his wife watch TV.231. A. liveB.livesC. livingD. is living232. A. schoolB. parksC. workD. shops233. A. theyB. heC. themD. his234. A. nightB. noonC. 9 o'clockD. afternoon235. A. vegetablesB.mealsC. meatD. tea236. A. toB.atC. fromD. in237. A. arrive atB.get toC. arrive inD. get238. A. earlyB. lateC. latelyD. quick239. A. whenB. afterC. beforeD. as240. A. looking atB. readsC. watchesD. reading【 答案】231. A232. A233. C234. B235. D236. C237. D238. B239. C240. D【 分析】文章介绍了格林一家一天的生活情况。

231 .句意: 格林一家住在国王街87号live住，动词原形；lives住，动词三单；living住，现在分词；is living正在住，现在进行时结构；陈述事实用一•般现在时，主语是“The Greens”指代一家人，动词要用原形，故选A232 . 句意：早上，格林先生去上班，孩子们去上学school 学校；parks 公园；work 工作；shops 商店；根据"the children"及"Their lathertakes...to school every day.“可知，孩子们去上学，故选A233 . 句意：他们的父亲每天带他们上学they他们，主格；he他，主格；them他们，宾格；his他的；take是动词，后接宾语，应用宾格them指代前面提到的“the children”，故选Co234 . 句意：她总是在中午吃午饭night 晚上；noon 中午；9 o,clock 九点；afternoon 下午；根据"eats her lunch”可知，吃午饭应该是在中午，故选B235 . 句意：他们经常一起喝茶vegetables蔬菜；meals饭；meat肉；tea茶；根据drink可知，喝的应该是茶，故选Do236 . 句意：晚上，孩子们放学回家。

to 朝；at 子. . .点时；from 从. . . . ；in 在. . . . 里；根据“the children come home”可知，孩子们是从学校回来，应用fro m ,故选C237 . 句意：他们到家很早arrive a t到达，后接小地点；get to 到达；arrive in 到达；get到达, 省略了介词to；home是地点副词，其前的介词要省略，故选D238 . 句意：格林先生下班回家，但他回家很晚early 早的；late 晚的；lately 最近；quick 快的；根据“They...home early.”及 but 转折可知 I , 此处指的是格林先生到家很晚，故选B239 . 句意：晚上，孩子们总是在睡觉前做作业when当. . .时；after在. . . . 之 后 ; before在. . . . 之前；a s当. . . . 时；根据常识可知，睡觉之前要做完作业，此处应用before引导时间状语从句，故选C240 . 句意：格林先生喜欢看报纸looking a t看；reads读，动词三单；watches观看；reading读，现在分词或动名词；由“newspapers”可知，此处应用read表示看文字类的内容，enjoy doing sth“ 喜欢做某事” ，应用动名词形式，故选D。

During National Day, Chinese people can enjoy a one-week holiday. People spend their241 in different ways. Some people may go home to get together with their families.Some may do some shopping and have 242 . Some may visit some places of243 with friends or family members. There are so many people in these places. Thiswill have some big problems. For example, too much 244 is dropped（ 扔） everywhere.Too many people will wait in front of the washroom. Food in these places will cost much245 and so 0n.But this year, people who visit Henan had a good time 246 the cheapest （ 最便宜）lunch in these tourist attractions （ 景点）. The workers in parks made special local foodfor 247 . The most interesting thing was that visitors enjoyed the delicious food withonly one yuan.The cooks made 1, 200 bowls of lunch for visitors. But they made 1, 275 yuan,248 more yuan than （ 比）they thought. They felt quite 249 and tried to findthe reasons （ 原因）. Finally they knew that was 250 some visitors wanted tothank these staffs for their help and kindness.241. A. holidayB. weekdayC. weekend242. A. lunchB. funC. time243. A. happinessB. interestC. fun244. A. rubbishB. riceC. bread245. A. fewerB. higherC. more246. A. drinkingB. eatingC. visiting247. A. workersB. cooksC. visitors248. A. 75B. 85C. 95249. A. happyB. afraidC. surprised250. A. soB. becauseC. as【 答案】241. A242. B243. B244. A245. C246. B247. C248. A249. C250. B【 分析】本文主要介绍了在国庆期间，河南旅游景点推出“ 一元午餐工241 . 句意：人们有很多的方式度过他们的假期。

holiday 假期；weekday 工作日；weekend 周末根据"During National Day”结合语境可知，此处指“ 国庆节” 242 .句意: 有些人可能会购物并玩得开心lunch 午餐；fun 娱乐；time 时间根据“Some may do some shopping and have”可知他们玩得很开心，have fun玩得开心，固定用法243 . 句意：有些人会和朋友或家人去名胜古迹happiness幸福；interest兴趣；fun有趣places of interest“ 名胜古迹” ，固定用法故选Bo244 . 句意：比如，垃圾扔得到处都是rubbish 垃圾；rice 米饭；bread 面包根据"too much... is dropped（ 扔） every where”可知此处指“ 垃圾” 到处都是245 . 句意：在这些地方吃饭会花费更多的钱等等fewer 更 少 ; higher 更高；more 更多根据“Food in these places will cost”结合常识可知在景区里的食物花钱更多246 . 句意：但是今年来河南游玩的人，在这些旅游景点吃到了最便宜的午餐。

drinking 喝；eating 吃 ; visiting 游玩根据"had a good time...the cheapest （ 最便宜）kmch”可知此处表示吃午餐247 . 句意：景区的工作人员为游客准备了当地的特色美食workers 工作人员；cooks 厨师；visitors 游客根据"The workers in parks made speciallocal food fbr…” 可知此处指景区的人为游客准备食物248 . 句意：但是他们收到了 1275元，比预想的多了 75元根据"The cooks made 1, 200 bowls of lunch fbr visitors”可知他们卖了 1200 碗，应挣1200元，但是实际上收到了 1275元，多挣了 75元249 . 句意：他们感觉很惊讶，想找到原因happy 高兴；afraid 担心；surprised 惊讶根据"more yuan than （ 比）they thought”可知他们收到的钱比预想的要高，所以他们很惊讶250 . 句意：最终他们了解到，这是因为一些游客想对这些工作人员的热心帮助表示感谢。

so 所以；because 因为；as 作为根据“tried to find the reasons （ 原因）. Finally theyknew that was...some visitors wanted to thank these staffs”可知这是他们收到更多钱的原因，用 because引导表语从句Hello! 251 name is Li Ying. I'm twelve. Fm from Kunming. Now I'm in BeijingNo.14 High School. Tm 252 Class Five, Grade One. Tm Number 4. Miss Gao253 my English teacher. She is 254 old teacher. I have （ 有） a pen, a ruler andtwo 255 in my pencil-box （ 文具盒） . Liu Ping is in Grade One, too. She is 256Guangzhou. She is my good 257 . We are in 258 same class. Now she259 at school. I think （ 认为） she is at home （ 在家） . Look （ 看） ! That is a 260 .but it is not my book.251. A. IB.MyC .YourD. Me252.A. fromB.toC .notD. in253.A. isB.arec.amD. be254.A. aB. anc.goodD. /255.A. busesB. desksc.schoolbagsD. pencils256.A. inB. toc.fromD. but257.A. friendB.teacherc.studentD. mom258.A. theseB.thec.anD. a259.A. isB. isn'tc.areD. aren't260.A. eraserB.rulerc.penD. book【 答案】251. B252. D253. A254. B255. D256. C257. A258. B259. B260. D【 导语】本文介绍了李颖所在的学校、她的老师、她的文具和朋友。

251 . 句意：我的名字叫李颖I 我； M y我的；Your你的；M e我根据"I'm twelve”可知此处介绍我，修饰名词nam e,应用形容词性物主代词My252 . 句意：我在七年级五班from来自；to 向；not不；in在. . .里表示在某个年级和班级，用介词in故选Do253 . 句意：高老师是我的英语老师is是，be动词的三单形式；are是，be动词的复数；am 是，主语是I； be是主语Miss Gao是第三人称单数形式，故谓语用第三人称单数形式，故为is254 . 句意：她是一位老教师a 一个；an一个；good好的；/ 零冠词；teacher是可数名词单数，且 old是元音音素开头，故用不定冠词an修饰255 . 句意：在我的文具盒里，有一支钢笔，一把尺子和两支铅笔buses 公交车；desks 书 桌 ; schoolbags 书包；pencils 铅笔根据“in my pencil box”可知在铅笔盒里的文具，应是铅笔256 . 句意:她来自广州in在. . .里；to 向；from来 自 ; but但是befirom”来自",固定搭配257 . 句意：她是我的好朋友。

friend 朋友；teacher 教师；student 学生；mom 妈妈根据前文的"Liu Ping is in GradeSeven too.”可知她也是一名七年级的学生，结合good可推断她是我的朋友2 5 8 .句意: 我们在同一个班级these这些；the定冠词；an 一个；a 一个the same“同 一 个 故 选 B2 5 9 .句意：现在她不在学校is是；isn't不是；are是；aren't不是根据后文的“I think（ 认为） she is at home（ 在家）可知她在家，因此不在学校，主语she是第三人称单数形式，故谓语用第三人称单数形式，故为isn't260 . 句意：那是一本书，但是它不是我的书eraser橡皮；ruler尺子；pen钢 笔 ; book书; 根据“my book”可知此处指的是书故选DoWe have many vegetables. They are 261 , carrots and broccoli. Vegetables havemany 262 . They are usually green, red, yellow 263 white. The 264vegetables are the best. We 265 many green vegetables every day. Vegetables are goodfor us. They are 266 food. We can make vegetable salad. I have some vegetable salad267 lunch. My sister Lucy 268 a baseball player. She 269 to eat fruitbest. She 270 a lot of fruit salad every day. It's good for her health.261.A. hamburgers B. tomatoesC.bananasD. apples262.A. colorsB. namesC.kindsD. meals263.A. butB.andc.soD. or264.A. whiteB. yellowc.greenD. red265.A. wantB.sellc.eatD. buy266.A. healthyB. Chinesec.happyD. relaxing267. A. atB. inC.forD. to268. A. areB.beC.amD.is269. A. needB.likesc.hasD.does270. A. eatB. sellsc.haveD.eats【 答案】261. B262. A263. B264. C265. C266. A267. C268. D269. B270. D【 分析】蔬菜有很多品种也有很多颜色，绿色的蔬菜是最好的，每天吃蔬菜对健康有好处，本文介绍了作者和妹妹Lucy喜欢吃的健康食物。

261 . 句意：它们是西红柿，胡萝卜和西兰花hamburgers 汉堡包；tomatoes 西红柿；bananas 香蕉；apples 苹果根据"We have manyvegetables",可知，这些是指一些蔬菜类，结合四个选项，只有B 选项符合，故选Bo262 . 句意：蔬菜有许多颜色colors 颜 色 ; names 名字；kinds 种类；meals 餐食根据“They are usually green, red,yellow"，可知，是有许多颜色，故选A263 . 句意：它们通常是绿色，红色，黄色和白色but但是；and和；so所以；o r或者yellow”和“white”之间是并列关系，故选B264 . 句意：绿色的蔬菜是最好的white 白色；yellow 黄色；green 绿色；red 红色根据"many green vegetables everyday”，可知，绿色食物最好，故选C265 . 句意：我们每天吃许多绿色蔬菜want 想要；sell 售卖；eat 吃；buy 买根据“Vegetables are good for us”, 可知，蔬菜对我们有好处，所以每天我们吃许多绿色蔬菜，故选C。

266 . 句意：它们是健康的食物healthy 健康的；Chinese 中国的；happy 开心的; relaxing 放松的根据“Vegetables aregood fo ru s",可知，蔬菜是健康的，所以对我们健康有好处，故选A267 . 句意：我中午吃一些蔬菜沙拉at在；in在. . .里；for为了； to 至 IJ固定搭配：have sth foMunch“ 午饭吃. . . . ” ，故选Co268 . 句意：我妹妹Lucy是一个棒球运动员are复数系动词；be动词原形；am 与主语I 一起连用；is 单数系动词主语Lucy是第三人称，系动词用i s , 故选Do269 . 句意：她最喜欢吃水果need需要；likes喜欢；has有；does做根据"She… to eat fruit best”, 可知, 她最喜欢吃水果，like...best“ 最喜欢. . . ” ，故选B270 . 句意：她每天吃许多水果沙拉eat吃；sells售 卖 ; have有 ; eats吃 , 三单形式根据“She…a lot of fruit salad”可知，她每天吃许多水果沙拉，主语she是第三人称，句子是一般现在时，谓语动词用三单形式，故选D。

Do you love music? Yes? Some boys 271 girls in Jing'an Middle School lovemusic, too. They 272 have dreams of being musicians. But their dreams are273 to achieve （ 实现）, 274 they have no money to 275 apiano, a guitar or a violin.Do you want to help 276 ? If you do, come and 277 us. We will havea great 278 at Students' Home in our school. 279 watches, clothes,schoolbags and many other things will be 280 sale here. WeUl use the money tohelp the 281 in Jing'an Middle School. We 282 buy pianos, guitars orviolins 283 them, or give （ 给）the money to them, and then they can have music284 . Our sale is 285 next Monday to Wednesday.We welcome all of you.271. A. orB. butC. soD. and272. A. tooB. alsoC. don'tD. then273. A. boringB. goodC. difficultD. easy274. A. andB. thenC. soD. because275. A. buyB.findC .playD. show276. A. theyB.themC .weD. us277. A. joinB.teachc.thankD. see278. A. tripB. salec.clubD. test279. A. BigB.Smallc.NiceD. Long280. A. inB. atc.onD. with281. A. teachersB.studentsc.boysD. girls282. A. doB.don'tc.canD. can't283. A. toB. atc.withD. for284. A. storiesB.librariesc.partiesD. lessons285. A. fromB.forc.underD. on【 答案】271. D272. B273. C274. D275. A276. B277. A278. B279. C280. C281. B282. C283. D284. D285. A【 导语】本文介绍了如何帮静安中学的学生圆音乐梦的。

2 7 1 . 句意：静安中学的男孩和女孩们也喜欢音乐o r或者；but但是；so 因此；and和and连接并列的主语2 7 2 . 句意：他们也有成为音乐人的梦想too 太 ; also 也 ; don't 不能；then 然后此空位于句中，根据"in Jing'an Middle Schoollove music, too.“可知他们也有音乐梦想273 . 句意：但是他们的梦想很难实现，因为它们没有钱买钢琴，吉他和小提琴、boring 无聊的；good 好的；difficult 困难的；easy 容易的根据“they have no moneyto...a piano, a guitar or a violin.”可知由于没钱, 所以实现梦想很难274 . 句意：但是他们的梦想很难实现，因为它们没有钱买钢琴，吉他和小提琴、and 和 ; then 然 后 ; so 因此；because 因为根据“But their dreams are...to achieve （ 实现）， …they have no money to...a piano, a guitar or a violin.”可知空后是很难实现梦想的原因。

故选D275 . 句意：但是他们的梦想很难实现，因为它们没有钱买钢琴，吉他和小提琴、buy 买；find 找到；play 玩；show 展示根据"they have no money to...a piano, a guitaror a violin.”可知此处指没钱买乐器276 . 句意：你想要帮助他们吗？they他们，主格；them他们，宾格；w e我们，主格；us我们，宾格此空位于动词后，用宾格，此空指上文的男孩和女孩们，用 them指代277 . 句意：如果是，来加入我们join加入；teach教；thank感谢；see看见根据"If you do, come and...”可知此处指力口入某人故选A,278 . 句意：我们要在学校学生之家举办一个大型售卖活动trip 旅 行 ; sale 出售；club 俱乐部；test 测试根据"watches, clothes, schoolbags andmany other things will be...sale here.”可知此处指售卖活动故选 B279 . 句意：好看的手表、衣服、书包和其他东西将在那出售Big 大的；Small 小的；Nice 好的；Long 长的。

根据“watches, clothes, schoolbags andmany other things ”可知此处修饰出售商品，因此是好的280 . 句意：好看的手表、衣服、书包和其他东西将在那出售in在. . .里；a t在某处；on在. . . . 上；with和on sale表示“ 出 售 故 选 C281 . 句意：我们会用这些钱帮助静安中学的学生们teachers老师；students学生；boys男孩；girls女孩此空指上文的男孩和女孩们，因此是学生282 . 句意：我们可以为他们买钢琴、吉他和小提琴，或者给他们钱，然后他们可以上音乐课do助动词；don't助动词否定式；can能；can't不能此句有谓语动词，此空指“ 可以“ 283 . 句意：我们可以为他们买钢琴、吉他和小提琴，或者给他们钱，然后他们可以上音乐课to 到；a t在某处；with和；for为了for sb表示“ 为 某 人 故 选 D284 . 句意：我们可以为他们买钢琴、吉他和小提琴，或者给他们钱，然后他们可以上音乐课stories故事；libraries图书馆；parties派对；lessons课程。

根据“have music”可知此处指上音乐课285 . 句意：我们的售卖在下周一到周三from 从；for 为了； under 在. . .下；on 在具体某一天根据“next Monday toWednesday”可知从周一到周三，from...to“ 从. . . 到. . . . 故选A完形填空My name is Santo Smith.My 286 name is Yu Feng. I come 287 Canada. But now mymom and I 288 in China. My mom is 289 English teacher in a junior high school.I'm a student. But my mom and I are in 290 schools. I 291 a good friend atschool 292 name is Wang Qiang. He is a Chinese boy. He is tall and strong. He likesEnglish very much. He often（ 经常） 293 English with me. And he is a good boy. He oftenhelps 294 and my classmates. We all like him. Oh, can you 295 the boy in white overthere （ 那边）? Do you think he is cool?.286. A. ChinaB. ChineseC.AmericaD. England287.A. fromB. inC.toD. for288.A. amB. isc.areD. be289.A. aB.anc.theD. /290.A. the sameB.samec.differentD. the different291.A. amB. lookc.thinkD. have292.A. HisB.He'sc.HerD. She's293.A. looksB. speaksc.wantsD. sees294.A. meB.Ic.myD. mine295.A. lookB.knowc.seeD. welcome【 答案】286. B287. A288. C289. B290. C291. D292. A293. B294. A295. C【 分析】试题分析：本文是作者介绍自己的生活情况以及自己和好朋友。

作者叫SantoSm ith,来自加拿大他和他妈妈现在住在中国他妈妈是一所初级中学的英语教师他也是一名学生，他有一个好朋友，名字叫王强王强经常帮助他和他的同学286 . 考查名词及语境的理解 A. C hina中国；B. Chinese中国人，中国的；C.America美国；D. England英国修饰名词name,故用形容词C hinese,故选B句意：我的中文名字是余风287 . 考查介词及语境的理解 A. from 来自；B. i n 在……里；C .to 向； D. for为了；根据短语come f?om“ 来自” ，故此处为from ,故选A句意：我来自加拿大288 . 考查动词及语境的理解A .am 是，主语是I； B .is是，主语是第三人称单数形式；C. are是，主语是复数形式；D. be是，动词原形因为主语是my mom and I , 因此谓语用复数形式a r e ,故选C句意：但是现在我妈妈和我在中国289 . 考查冠词及语境的理解 A.a —； B .an—； C. the那个；D./零冠词因为English是元音音素开头，故用不定冠词an来修，故选B句 意 :我妈妈是一所初级中学的英语老师。

290 . 考查形容词及语境的理解 A. the sam e同样；B. sam e同样的C. different不同的；D. the different不同的；修饰复数名词schools,故用形容词different,故选C句意：我妈妈和我在不同的学校291 . 考查动词及语境的理解A .am 是；B. look看；C. think想； D. have有结合上下文，此处表示有一个朋友，故选D句意：我在学校有一个好朋友292 . 考查代词及语境的理解 A. His他的；B.H e's他 是 ; C.H er她的；D.She's她;根据He is a Chinese boy.可知我的好朋友是一个男孩，修饰名词nam e,故用h is ,故选A o 句意：他的名字叫王强293 . 考查动词及语境的理解A. looks看；B. speaks说； C. w ants想；D. sees看见根据短语speak English“ 说英语” ，故此处用动词speaks,故选B句意：他经常和我一起说英语294 . 考查代词及语境的理解A .m e我，作宾语或表语；B .I我，作主语；C. m y我的，作定语；D. mine我 的 （ 东西） ，作主语、宾语或表语。

此处作动词helps的宾语，故用宾格m e ,故选A句意：他经常帮助我和我的同学295 . 考查动词及语境的理解 A. look看；B. know 知道；C. se e 看见，D. welcome欢迎此处表示看见，强调结果，故用动词s e e ,故选C句意：你能看见那个穿白衣服的男孩吗？考点：日常生活类短文Hello! My name is Varatha. Tm a（ n） 296 、 but I don't teach young students. Mystudents are 25 to 40 years old and they come to me to learn English. They want to useEnglish at work or on vacation.I love my job but it isn't 297 ! My students have jobs too, and I teach them afterthey get off work. We 298 classes at 7: 10 p.m. and finish at 9: 40 p.m. It's very299 when I get home, and I'm quite tired.I teach my students grammar （ 语法）and new words, and I ask 300 to speakEnglish in class. Now they can speak English better than before with my help. Tm reallyhappy to teach them.296. A. teacherB. artistC.workerD. musician297. A. difficultB. beautifulC.easyD. different298. A. leaveB. startc.missD. want299. A. earlyB. latec.terribleD. noisy300. A. youB.herc.himD. them【 答案】296. A297. C298. B299. B300. D【 导语】本文主要介绍了作者的工作是教25到 4 0 岁的人学习英语，课程是晚上开始，结束后作者回到家都很晚，也很累。

在作者的帮助下，学生们英语说得比之前更好296 . 句意：我是一名老师，但我不教小学生teacher 老师；artist 艺术家；worker 工人；musician 音乐家根据"but I don't teachyoung students”可知，前半句表达的是作者是一名老师，故选A297 . 句意：我喜欢我的工作，但它不容易difficult 困难的；beautiful 美丽的；easy 容易的；different 不同的根据“when I gethome, and I'm quite tired”可知，作者的工作并不容易，故选C298 . 句意：我们7 点 10分开始上课，9 点 40分结束leave 离开；start 开始；miss 错过；want 想要根据“and finish at 9: 40 p.m”可知，前半句介绍课程开始的时间，故选B299 . 句意：当我到家的时候已经很晚了，我很累early 早；late 迟；terrible 糟糕的；noisy 吵闹的根据“finish at 9: 40 p.m”可知，晚上9:40下课，回家更晚，故选B300 . 句意：我教我的学生语法和新单词，我要求他们在课堂上说英语。

you 你；her 她；him 他 ; them 他们根据"I teach my students grammar （ 语法）andnew words”可知，此处指让学生们在课堂上说英语，应填th em ,故选DI'm a student at Sunshine Middle School. 301 school is very beautiful. Theplayground is very big. We often chat （ 聊天） with each other or play sports on the playgroundafter class.There are many classrooms in the teaching building. Our classrooms are clean andbright. My classroom is on the ground floor. We also have 302 music room, an artroom and two computer 303 .Our libraiy is new and 304 . There are lots of books in it. It is open from 8:00a.m. to 5:30 p.m., but the reading room is only open in the afternoon. We often go there andcan 305 all kinds of books. Sometimes we can also borrow （ 借） books from thelibrary. We also have a school hall. We have meetings there.301. A. HisB. OurC.MineD. Your302. A. twoB.由eC.aD. an303. A. roomB.schoolc.shopsD. rooms304. A. oldB. shortc.bigD. small305. A. sayB.seec.readD. listen【 答案】301. B302. C303. D304. C305. C【 分析】本文作者介绍了所在学校的一些设施，包含操场、教室、图书馆等。

301 . 句意：我们的学校非常的漂亮His他的；Our我们的；Mine我的，名词性物主代词；Your你 （ 们）的根据上文， Tm a student at Sunshine Middle School.“可知，文章是第•人称写的，此处表达的应是“ 我们的” ，用形容词性物主代词"our”, "our school”表示“ 我们的学校” 302 . 句意：我们也有一间音乐室，一间美术室和两间电脑室two两 （ 个） ；the这、那，定冠词，表示特指；a -（ 个） ，不定冠词表示泛指，用于以辅音音素头的单词前；an -（ 个） ，不定冠词表示泛指，用于以元音音素开头的单词前根据"We also have ... music room”可 知 , "music room”在文中第一次出现，此处表示泛指，表示“ 一间” ，“music”首字母是辅音音素开头303 . 句意：我们也有一间音乐室，一间美术室和两间电脑室room房间，单数名词；school学校，单数名词；shops商店，复数形式；rooms房间，复数名词根据空前“two computer…”可知，这里应是“ 两间电脑室" ，room表示“ 房间” ，复数形式为“ro o m s '故选D。

304 . 句意：我们的图书馆又新又大old 老的；short 短的；big 大的；small 小的根据下文“There are lots of books in it."可知，图书馆应该又新又大305 . 句意：我们经常去那里阅读各种各样的书籍say说；see看；read阅读；listen听根据空格后的“all kinds of books”可知, 这里应是去图书馆阅读书籍，应用“read”After eating lunch, mother finds she has got a cold. She does need to have a rest in bed.But first she has a few things to do. Prepare the meat for 306 . Leave a note for thecleaners.At last, she falls into bed, soon 307 .Then the door bangs （ 砰的——声） open as the 308 came home from school.“Mom! Mom! Where are you?” "Don't you 309 get up yet?” "What about dinner?^^'Tm sick. And I can't do anything. TH have to 310 all to you. Cook thepotatoes. Take care of the baby. Put plates, spoons, forks and 311 on the table.^^“WonderfUl!” "No problem!,5 The children run off 312 . Mother is left in herquiet room. She doesn't feel 313 ! But everyone else seems great. In fact, thereseems to be a party going on with loud laughs 314 the children.There is a sudden crash （ 破碎声） . Then a voice shouts, "Get the baby out of the way3j 5 he cuts himself! Don't break Mom's rest!^ ^Another crash 3J6! The younger girl rushes in with the news. t4Theydropped your plate and the dog ate all your dinner.^^The girl runs off. There is more noise until, finally, the children appears,3J7. They are proud of what they bring. There is a glass of water, three beans, acold boiled potato and a small 3J8 of burned meat.Suddenly, mother feels 3 1 9 . As the children watch carefully, she eats hercold dinner. ^Everything 320 so good,^^ mother smiles. "Thank you, my kids. Ifeel better now.^ ^306. A. breakfastB.teaC .lunchD. dinner307. A. awakeB.angryC .asleepD. happy308. A. fatherB. cleanersc.childrenD. dog309. A. everB. evenc.neverD. hardly310. A. leaveB. throwc.putD. get311. A. fruitsB. glassesc.booksD. hats312. A. happilyB. sadlyc.quietlyD. angrily313. A. goodB.happyc.relaxedD. well314. A. ofB.inc.fromD. to315. A. afterB. beforec.whenD. until316. A. goesB. comesc.stopsD. does317. A. cryingB. smilingc.cookingD. sleeping318. A. boxB. bagc.setD. piece319. A. tiredB.afraidc.weakD. great320. A. tastesB. looksc.smellsD. sounds【 答案】306. D307. C308. C309. B310. A311. B312. A313. D314. C315. B316. B317. B318. D319. D320. A【 导语】本文主要讲述了孩子们为生病的母亲做晚饭的故事。

306 . 句意：准备晚餐用的肉breakfast 早饭；tea 茶；lunch 午饭；dinner 晚饭根据“After eating Lunch,”以及“Whatabout dinner?”可知，此处是指准备晚饭用的肉307 . 句意：最后，她倒在床上，很快就睡着了awake 醒的；angry 生气的；asleep 睡着的；happy 高兴的根据“She does need to havea rest in bed.”以及“she falls into bed,”可知，上文提到妈妈想去床上休息一 下 ，因此此处是指睡着了308 . 句意：当孩子们放学回家时，门砰地一声开了father 父 亲 ; cleaners 清洁工；children 孩子们；dog 狗根据"came home from school."可知，从学校回来，此处应是“ 孩子们” 309 . 句意：难道你还没起床吗？ever 曾经；even 甚至；never 从不；hardly 几乎不根据"Don't you...get up yet?”可知,此处是指你还没有起床吗even”符合语境310 . 句意：我病了我什么都做不了。

我得把一切都留给你们做leave 离开, 留给；throw 扔 ; put 放置；get 得到根据'Tm sick. And I can't doanything.”可知，此处是指妈妈生病了，因此要把一切事留给孩子们去做311 . 句意：把盘子、勺子、叉子和玻璃杯放在桌子上fruits 水果；glasses 玻璃杯；books 书；hats 帽子根据"Put plates, spoons, forks and… onthe table.“可知，此处是指把盘子、勺子、叉子和玻璃杯放在桌子上glasses”符合语境312 . 句意：“ 太好了！ ” “ 没问题！ ”孩子们高兴地跑开了happily开心地；sadly悲伤地; quietly安静地；angrily生气地根据"Wonderful!”以及“N problem!”和通读全文可知，孩子们是很乐意帮助妈妈分担家务，此处应是开心地跑开313 . 句意：她感觉不舒服！good好的；happy高兴的；relaxed放松的；well好的（ 形容身体） 根据上文可知，妈妈感觉身体不舒服314 . 句意：事实上，从孩子们的发出的笑声中看出，似乎有一个聚会正在进行。

of 属于. . .;in 在. . . . 里面；from 来自；to 至 ! | 根据"with loud laughs...the children."可知，此处是指来自孩子们的笑声315 . 句意：然后一个声音喊道：“ 在他割伤自己之前把孩子弄走！不要打扰妈妈的休息 ！ ”after在. . .之后；before在. . . . 之前；when当. . . . 时 候 ; until直到结合上下文可知，“Get the baby out of the way”发生在"he cuts himself'之前, 用 before« 故选 B316 . 句意：另一个危机来了！goes 走；comes 来 ; stops 停 止 ; does 做根据"Another crash..."以及“They dropped yourplate and the dog ate all your dinner.“可知，盘子碎了，此处是指另一个危机来了，“comes”符合语境317 . 句意：喧闹声越来越大，直到孩子们微笑着出现crying 哭；smiling 笑；cooking 做饭；sleeping 睡觉。

根据"They are proud of what theybring.“可知，此处是指孩子们为自己所做的事情感到骄傲，所以是开心的故选B.3 1 8 .句意：有一杯水、三颗豆子、一个冷煮土豆和一小块烧焦的肉box 盒子；bag 包 ; set一套；piece一块 , 一条根据"a small... of burned meat.”可知,此处是指一小块烧焦的肉固定短语a piece 广一块” 3 1 9 .句意：突然间，妈妈感觉很好tired 累的；afraid 害怕的; weak 虚弱的; great 好的根据“Mother smiles.'Thank you,my kids. I feel better now/ "可知，此处是指妈妈感觉很好3 2 0 .句意: 所有的东西尝起来都很好吃tastes尝起来；looks看起来；smells闻起来；sounds听起来根据"she eats her colddinner.”可知，东西应是尝起来Dear Wang Hong,Thank you for your letter. You said, uMany trees and flowers come back to 321So it must be 322 in China now. In 323 it is fall. It is getting 324 . Butit never gets really cold here. 325 is the best time to go to Australia? Australians willtell you “Any time is good.,, 326 many people think the best time is summer. It is hotand sunny at that time of a year. I like summer 327 , because in summer I cango 328 in the sea. Ifs great.Swimming is very popular in Australia. Some people swim in four 329 . But Idon't swim in 330 . It is winter in Australia. The sea water is too cold.Best wishes.Yours, Tom321.A.homeB. lifeC.seasonD. body322.A.fallB. summerC.winterD. spring323.A.AustraliaB. Japanc.EnglandD. China324.A.warmB. hotc.coldD. dark325.A.HowB.Whoc.WhereD. When326.A.SoB.Becausec.ButD. Or327.A.goodB.wellc.betterD. best328.A.shoppingB. hikingc.swimmingD. studying329.A.yearsB. seasonsc.monthsD. weeks330.A.MarchB. Aprilc.JulyD. December【 答案】321. B322. D323. A324. C325. D326. C327. D328. C329. B330. C【 导语】本文是Tom写给Wang Hong的 •封 信 ，主要介绍了去澳大利亚的最佳时间和作者最喜欢的季节。

321 . 句意：许多树和花苏醒过来了home家；life活力；season季节；body身体,固定搭配come back to life"苏醒过来" ，故选B322 . 句意：所以现在一定是中国的春天fall秋天；summer夏天；winter冬天；spring 春天，根据"Many trees and flowers come back to life”可知,此处指中国的春天，故选D323 . 句意: 在澳大利亚是秋天Australia澳大利亚；J叩a n 日本；England英国；China中国，根据"is the best time to go to Australia”可知I , 此处指澳大利亚是秋天，故选 Ao324 . 句意：天气变冷了warm暖和的; hot热的；cold冷的；dark黑暗的，根据“Butit never gets really cold here”可知, 此处指天气变冷了, 故选C325 . 句意：什么时候是去澳大利亚最好的时间？ How怎样；Who谁；Where在哪；When什么时候，根据"is the best time to go to Australia”可知，此处在问时间，故选Do326 . 句意：但是许多人认为最好的时间是在夏天。

So所以；Because因为；But但是；Or 或者，“Australians will tell you "Any time is good"和“many people think the besttime is summer”是转折关系，故选Co327 . 句意：我最喜欢夏天good好的，形容词；well好地，副词；better比较好，good/well 比较级；best 最好，good/well 最高级，根据"Because in summer I cango in the sea. Ifs great”可知, 此处指最喜欢夏天，故选D328 . 句意: 因为夏天我能去海里游泳shopping购物；hiking徒步；swimming游泳；studying学习，根据“in the sea”可知，此处指在海里游泳，故选C329 . 句意：一些人在四季游泳years年；seasons季节；months月份；weeks周，根据“fbur”可知，此处指四季，故选B330 . 句意：但是我在七月不游泳March三月；April四月；July七月；December +二月，根据“It is winter in Australia”可知，澳大利亚的冬天是在七月，故选C。

完形填空 共 10小题，I have a brother. His name 331 Ben. We look 332 I am tall, but Ben is short. Ben333 a big mouth, but my mouth is small. I have big eyes, 334 his eyes are small.Ben and I like different 335 and colours. I like white shirts, blue shorts and brown shoes.336 is Ben's favourite colour, so he likes to 337 black coats, black pants and blackshoes. 338 like different food, too. Ben often has hamburgers and coke 339meals（ 餐） . But I don't like hamburgers or coke. I like having rice and noodles. 1 like eggnoodles, but Ben doesn't like to 340 eggs.331. A. amB.isC .areD. are332.A. funnyB. oldC .newD. different333.A. showsB.hasc.putsD. needs334.A. butB. orc.\D. so335.A. foodB. booksc.clothesD. fruit336.A. BlackB. Whitec.RedD. Green337.A. borrowB. planc.catchD. wear338.A. WeB. Theyc.SheD. You339.A. fromB.forc.onD. with340.A. playB.paintc.eatD. draw【 答案】331. B332. D333 . B334. A335. C336. A337. D338. A339. B340. C【 分析】试题分析：这篇短文主要介绍了我和我弟弟Ben之间的不同，外貌不同，喜欢的衣服不同，喜欢的颜色不同还有喜欢吃的食物也不同。

3 3 1 .考查系动词及语境句意：他的名字叫Ben此题考查主谓一致，主语是第三人称单数，故选B3 3 2 .考查形容词及语境句 意 :我们看起来不同A. funny有趣的；B. old年老的；C. new新的；D. different不同的；根据后面句意，我高，他矮，故选D333 . 考查动词及语境句意：他有一张大嘴，但是我的嘴很小A. shows展示；B.has有：C. puts放；D. needs需要；此题考查主谓一致，主语是第三人称单数，根据句意，故选B o334 . 考查连词及语境句意：我有大眼睛，但是他的眼睛很小前后句是转折的关系，根据句意，故 选 Ao335 . 考查名词及语境句意： Ben和我喜欢不同的衣服和颜色A. food食物；B.books书：C. clothes衣服；D. fruit水果：根据后面的句意，我喜欢白色的衬衣，他喜欢黑色衬衣，故选C336 . 考查名词及语境句意：黑色是他最喜爱的颜色根据后面句意，他喜欢穿黑色的外套，黑色的裤子和黑色的鞋子337 . 考查动词及语境句意：他喜欢穿着黑色的外套，黑色的裤子和黑色的鞋子A.borrow借；B. plan计划；C. catch追赶；D. wear穿着；根据句意，故选D。

338 . 考查代词及语境句 意 :我们也喜欢不同的事物A. W e我们；B. They他们；C. She她；D. You你；根据短文意思，介绍的是我和Ben,我们之间的不同，故选A339 . 考查介词及语境句意：Ben 一 日三餐经常吃汉堡和可乐对于一日三餐来说用介词for；根据句意，故选B340 . 考查动词及语境句意：我喜欢吃面条但是Ben不喜欢吃鸡蛋A. play玩；B.paint画画；C. eat吃；D. draw画画；根据句意；是我喜欢吃面条，但 是 Ben不喜欢吃鸡蛋可知答案选C考点：考查日常生活类短文完形填空阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从每小题A、B、C 三个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项，并将其字母标号填入提前的括号内The same as Chinese schools, American schools begin in after a long summerholiday. There are two in a school year. The first one is from September to Januaryand the is from February to June.Most American children begin to go to school when they are five years old. They usuallyspend years in primary school （ 小学） and middle school. Most students are seventeenyears old when they middle school.Middle school students take only four or five each term, such as English, math,science and so on. They are helpful a n d . T h e students go to classes happily every day.Of course, the students have homework（ 作业）every day. The most commo n homework isbook report. To finish h o m e w o rk ,n e e d to go to the library a lot.They have many kinds of activities school. Some are about sports, likeswimming, ball games, and gymnastics（ 体操） .Some are a b o u t , like singing, dancingand drawing pictures. Students have a lot of fun from these after-school activitie s in their freetime.341.A. JuneB.SeptemberC. January342.A. termsB.weeksC. hours343.A. firstB. secondC. third344.A. fiveB. twelveC. seventeen345.A. haveB. takeC. finish346.A. subjectsB.lessonsC. names347.A. boringB. welcomeC. healthy348.A. theyB.weC. you349.A. aboutB.fromC. after350.A. artB.foodC. games【 答案】341. B342. A343. B344. B345. C346. A347. B348. A349. C350. A【 分析】试题分析：这篇短文主要介绍了美国的小学，高中及大学的教育体制及学生的学习活动。

美国学生一年有两个学期，上学期是从九月到一月，第二个学期是从二月到六月，共十个月的在校时间大部分的学生上的都是公立学校，他们经常一次只学习4-5门课程，因此有很多的课余时间高中毕业后，要上大学，需要支付很高的费用，虽然他们有奖学金，但很多学生课余时间要做兼职来挣高额的学费341. B 考查名词及语境理解句意：在长长的暑假后，美国学校也在九月份开学A. June六月；B. September九月；C. January一月与中国的假期一样，故答案为B342. A 考查名词及语境理解句意：一年有两个学期A. terms学期； B. weeks周；C. hour小时依据句意，答案为A343. B 考查序数词及语境理解句意：第二学期从二月到六月A. first第一；B.second第二；C. third第三上文提到共两个学期，故答案为B344. B 考查数词及语境理解句意：他们通常小学中学要上十二年的时间A. five5； B.twelvel2； C. seventeen"五岁上学，十七岁高中毕业因此共12年答案为B345. C 考查动词及语境理解句意：高中毕业，大多数学生17岁 A. have有；B.take拿，带走；C. finish完成。

finish middle school.高中毕业故答案为C346. A 考查名词及语境理解句意: 中学生每学期只学习四五门科目A. subjects科目；B. lessons功课；C. names名字通过下文的举例，可知答案为A347. B 考查形容词及语境理解句意：它们有用而且受欢迎A. boring无聊的； B.welcome受欢迎的；C. healthy健康的依据语境理解，故答案为B348. A 考查代词及语境理解句意：为了完成作业，他们经常性的去图书馆 A.they他们，B. we我们； C. you你们此处代指学生故答案为A349. C 考查介词及语境理解句意：放学后，他们有许多课外活动A. about关于；B. from从……；C. after在……之后由课外活动可知是放学后，故答案为C350. A 考查名词及语境理解句意：有些是有关艺术类的，比如：唱歌，跳舞，绘画 A. art美术，艺术；B. food食物；C. games比赛依据举例可知，答案为A考点：教育类短文A science teacher wants to tell an idea to his students. He takes a large-mouth bottle and351 a few large stones （ 石头）in it. He then asks the class: "Is the bottle 352now?'' They all answer: "Yes!"The teacher then takes some small stones and puts them into the 353 . The smallstones go into the room （ 空间） 354 the big stones. He then asks: "Is it full?'5 Thistime 355 students give no answer, but most answer: "Yes!"The teacher then starts to drop some 356 into the bottle. The sand goes into theroom between the small stones. For the 357 time, the teacher asks: "Is it full?” Nowmost are thinking, but still, some say: "Yes!”Then the teacher brings out a cup of water into the bottle and asks: "What's the point（ 关键） of this 358 ?" One angry student answers: "You can 359 find time todo more things.^^“No," says the teacher. "The point is that if you don't put the big stones first, you'llnever get them in. The big stones are the 360 things in your life. If your life is full ofsmall things, the sand and the water 一 you'll never have the time for the important things.^^351. A. collectsB.putsC .getsD. gives352. A. fullB. brokenC .heavyD. light353. A. mouthB. cupc.bottleD. bowl354. A. behindB. besidec.belowD. between355. A. someB. plentyc.anyD. many356. A. waterB. stonesc.milkD. sand357. A. firstB.secondc.thirdD. fourth358. A. sportB.showc.playD. art359. A. alwaysB.neverc.sometimesD. usually360. A. beautifulB.importantc.carefulD. interesting【 答案】351. B352. A353. C354. D355. A356. D357. C358. B359. A360. B【 解析】该文介绍了一个科学老师用巧妙的方法告诉他的学生们一个道理：如果生活中充满了小的事情，你就不可能去做大的事情。

351 . 句意：他拿了一个广口瓶，放了几个大石头在里面collects 收 集 ; puts 放；gets 获 得 ; gives 给根据“a fbw large stones （ 石头）in it.“可知，是把石头" 放' ’ 进了瓶子里面352 . 句意：现在瓶子满了吗？full满的；broken损坏的；heavy重的；light轻的根据后文中几次提到"Is it fiill?”可知，此处老师问学生们瓶子是否满了，故选A353 . 句意：然后老师又拿了一些小石头，把它们放在瓶子里.mouth 嘴 ; cup 杯 子 ; bottle 瓶 子 ; bowl 碗联系上文中“He takes a large-mouth bottle”可知，老师把一些小石头放进瓶子里，故选C354 . 句意：小石头进入了大石块之间的空隙behind在后面；beside在旁边; below在 下 面 ; between在. . .之间根据后文中“Thesand goes into the room between the small stones.“可知，小石头是进入了大石头之间的空隙，故选D355 . 句意：这一次有的同学没有回答，但大多数人回答：“ 是的！ ”some一些；plenty大量的；any任何；many许多。

联系后句“ but most answer...”可知,有一些同学没有回答，故选A356 . 句意：然后老师开始往瓶子里倒沙子water zK； stones 石头；milk 牛奶；sand 沙根据后文“The sand goes into the roombetween the small stones.”可知I , 老师放了 一些沙子357 . 句意：老师第三次问道：“ 满了吗？”first第一；second第二；third第三；fourth第四联系上文的两次提问，可知这是老师第三次提问同样的问题了，故选C358 . 句意：这个演示的重点是什么？sport运动；show展示； play剧；art艺术根据语境，老师在给学生们演示一个实验，所以这里是做展示给同学们看，故选B359 . 句意：一个愤怒的学生回答说：“ 你总能抽出时间做更多的事情always总是； never从不：sometimes有时；usually通常根据实验过程可知，老师总是可以在瓶子里放物品360 . 句意：大石头是你生活中的重要的事beautiful美丽的；important重要的；careful仔细的；interesting有趣的。

联系后句“Ifyou your life is full of small things, the sand and the water - you'll never have the time for theimportant things.”可知，这里把大石头比作重要的事情，故选BWe had a school trip last weekend. It was sunny in the morning. Some students werelate.Then we 361 the school bus for half an hour, but it didn't 362 . Soour teacher took us to take the subway. It 363 us about an hour. After we got off thesubway, we walked and got lost. When we 364 arrived at the zoo, we were tired andhungry. We wanted to 365 giraffes, but there weren't any. There were some reallysmart dogs, but we didn't watch the show because we arrived too late. We 366 ourcamera ( 照相机) at school, so we didn't take any photos. Then it started to rain, and no onehad a(n) 367 So we went for 368 . My friends had some bread. But Ididn't have any, because I don't like it. We didn't see many animals because of the rain.Finally we went back to school. We were so 369 and wet. What a 370trip! We didn't enjoy it at all.361. A. looked afterB. paid forC. waited forD. took off362. A. arriveB. getC. goD. bring363. A. paidB.spentC. costD. took364. A. finallyB. suddenlyC. certainlyD. firstly365. A. seeB. hearC. soundD. read366. A. sentB.leftC. askedD. remembered367. A. bookB.umbrellaC. schoolbagD. sweater368. A. breakfastB.supperC. mealD. lunch369. A. excitedB. relaxedC. tiredD. happy370. A. interestingB.terribleC. niceD. great【 答案】361. C362. A363. D364. A365. A366. B367. B368. D369. C370. B【 导语】本文主要介绍了作者的一次糟糕的旅行。

361 . 句意：然后我们等了半个小时校车，但没有来looked after 照顾；paid for 付 款 ; waited for 等候；took off 脱 下 , K机起飞根据"theschool bus for half an hour”可知，应该是等校车，故选C362 . 句意：然后我们等了半个小时校车，但没有来arrive到达；get到达, 后面接介词to； go去；bring带来根据"So our teacher took usto take the subway.”可知，应该是校车没有来，空后没有介词t o , 故选A363 .句意: 它花了我们大约一小时paid花费，主语是人，花费的是金钱；spent主语是人，花费的是金钱或时间；cost花费，主语是物，花费的是金钱；took花费，主语是i t , 花费的是时间根据“it”和“anhour”可知，应该用to o k ,故选D364 . 句意：当我们最终到达动物园时，我们又累又饿finally 最 终 ; suddenly 突然；certainly 当然；firstly 首先根据“It...us about an hour.After we got off the subway, we walked and got lost”可知，应该是终于到动物园时，故选Ao365 . 句意：我们想要去看长颈鹿，但是这没有。

see看见，看的结果；hear听见；sound听起来；read阅读根据“giraffes, but thereweren't any”可知，应该是看长颈鹿且空后没有介词a t , 所以用动词s e e ,故选A366 . 句意：我们把照相机落在学校了，所以我们没有拍任何照片sent 发送；left 落在；asked 让；remembered 记得根据"so we didn't take any photos”可知，照相机被落在学校了，故选B367 . 句意：然后下雨了，没有人有雨伞book 书；umbrella 雨伞；schoolbag 书包；sweater 毛衣根据"We were so...and wet”可知，应该是没有雨伞，故选B368 . 句意：所以我们去吃午饭了breakfast 早饭；supper 晚饭；meal 饭；lunch 午饭根据“It was sunny in the morning”可知，此时应该是去吃午饭，故选D369 . 句意：我们又累又湿excited兴奋的；relaxed放松的；tired累的；happy开心的根据前文的一天的活动可知，应该很疲惫，故选C。

3 7 0 .句意：多么糟糕的一次旅行啊！interesting 有趣的；terrible 糟糕的；nice 好的；great 好的根据“We didn't enjoy it atall.”可知，应该是不好的旅行，故选B完形填空阅读下文，掌握其大意，然后从各题所给的四个选项中选出一个最佳答案Hi, everybody! Welcome to Taiwan! Now I would like to show you 371 thisisland. After that, you will find that it is as beautiful as many 372 places in ourcountry.Do you know anything about the Sun Moon Lake? You 373 ask why people callit so. If you fly high up 374 the lake and look down from the plane, you will find theanswer by yourself. In the middle of this lake, there is a small island. People call it PearlIsland（ 珍珠岛） because it 375 like a pearl. On one side of Pearl Island, this lake is likethe sun and on the other side it is like the moon. That is 376 people call the lake theSun Moon Lake.There are many mountains around this lake. The Ali Mountain is near the Sun MoonLake. We will stay there 377 three days. You can also have a dance party with thelocal people. You can climb the mountain and watch the sun 378 slowly in the west.Of course, you can 379 early and enjoy the beautiful sunrise（ 日出） in the morning.Now, do you think Taiwan is a wonderful place 380 ?371.A. aboveB. overC. ofD. around372.A. otherB. the otherC. elseD. others373.A. wantB.mayC. canD. need374.A. onB.inC. overD. past375.A. soundsB. looksC. seesD. watches376.A. whenB.whyC. whatD. where377.A. forB. withC. inD. till378.A. rise upB. go downC. fly awayD. go up379.A. put upB.set upC. look upD. get up380.A. to visitB.visitC. visitsD. visiting【 答案】37L D372. A373. B374. C375. B376. B377. A378. B379. D380. A【 分析】本文叙述了台湾的著名的湖——日月潭，因为在湖的中间有一个小岛，这个小岛叫珍珠岛，在珍珠岛的一边是像太阳，另一边像月亮，因而人们起名叫日月潭。

在这个湖的周围有许多山，早晨爬上山可以看见日出371・ 句意：现在我想要带领你们参观这个岛above 在. . .上面；over 在. . . . 上面；of.......的；around 周围show sb. around sth.领着某人参观372 . 句意：在那之后，你可以看到它和中国的其他地方一样美丽other其他的，后跟名词；the other表示特指，后跟名词；else其他的，常用来修饰代词，放于代词之后；others其他的，后不能跟名词因为中国有许多美丽的地方，所以这里不是特指，故选A373 . 句意：你也许要问人们为什么要这样称呼它want想要；may也许；can能够；need需要因为空格后是动词，所以这里应该用情态动词，may也许，符合题意374 . 句意：如果你飞过湖面，从飞机上往下看，你会自己找到答案on在. . .上面,表示两物相接触；in在. . . . 里 面 ; over在. . . . 上方；两物不接触；past经过根据look down from the plane可知指的是从空中向下看，故选C375 . 句意：人们称之为珍珠岛，因为它看起来像一颗珍珠。

sounds听起来；looks看起来；sees看见；watches观看look lik e看起来像，故选Bo376 . 句意：那就是人们叫它日月潭的原因when当. . .时候；w hy为什么；what什么；where哪里That is why…” 那是. . . . 的原因” ，故选B377 . 句意：我们在那里野营了三天fo r后接时间段，表示持续一段时间；w ith和；in在. . .里面；till直到这里表示动作持续的时间段，故选A378 . 句意：你可以爬上山，看见太阳在西方慢慢地落下rise up上升，提高；go down下降；fly away飞走；go up上升这里是观看太阳下山，故选B379 . 句意：你可以早起欣赏早晨美丽的日出put up 张贴；set up 建立；look up 查 阅 ; get up 起床根据“enjoy the beautiful sunrise（ 日出） in the morning.”可知看日出当然要早起，故选Do3 8 0 .句意：你认为台湾是一个可以参观的好地方吗？visit是动词，意为“ 参观" ，to visit是动词不定式；visits是动词单数第三人称形式；visiling是动词的现在分词形式。

这里用动词不定式作定语修饰名词p lace,故选ADear Bryan,I came back from London 381 my parents this morning. This trip was 382 . butwe had a great time in the end. First of all, we had to wait 383 two hours because ourplane had 384 problem. When we 385 London, it was raining. We didn't haveany pounds（ 英镑） and the 386 was closed, so we 387 walk to the hotel. Thatday a big room was £ 500 a night. We booked （ 预订） a room 388 we left Shanghai.But because the hotel didn't 389 it down（ 记录下） ， they gave us the 390 for£ 100 a night! So we stayed there 391 . We could see a park from the room. Theweather there was cool 392 cloudy, just right for 393We must 394 for a drink sometime so I can't 395 you more about it. Give me acall.Hank381. A. andB.forC. withD. to382. A. relaxingB. terribleC. interestingD. boring383. A. withB.inC. ofD. for384. A. aB. anC. theD. /385. A. arrived atB. get inC. arrived inD. got in386. A. hospitalB. bankC. restaurantD. cinema387. A. couldB.mustC. had toD. need388. A. andB. orC. becauseD. before389. A. takeB. writeC. makeD. say390. A. roomB. foodC. clothesD. message391. A. quicklyB. difficultlyC. happilyD. easily392. A. andB. butC. soD. with393. A. walkB. walkingC. to walkD. walked394. A. get upB. go outC. grow upD. call back395. A. sayB, speakC. talkD. tell【 答案】381. C382. B383. D384. A385. C386. B387. C388. D389. B390. A391. C392. A393. B394. B395. D【 分析】这是一封Hank写给Bryan的一封信，Hank介绍了和父母一起去伦敦旅行的故事。

3 8 1 .句意：今天早上我和我的父母从英国回来A. and和，又；B. for为了； C. with和 一起；D. to 至 ！J ；根据my parents this morning可知是和父母一起根据句意，故选C3 8 2 .句意：这次旅行很糟糕，但是在最后我们玩得很开心A. relaxing放松的；B.terrible 糟糕的; C. interesting 有趣的；D. boring 无聊的根据下文 but we had a greattime in the end.可知上文是这次旅行很糟糕根据题意，故选B383. . 句意：首先，由于我们的飞机有问题我们不得不等两个小时A. with带有，具有；B. in在. . .里面；C. of ........的；D. for为了短语wait for…表示等待根据句意，故选D384 . 句意：首先，由于我们的飞机有问题我们不得不等两个小时A.a - 个，用在首字母辅音音素开头前；B .an一个，用在首字母元音音素开头前； C. the定冠词；那个； D./problem是以首字母辅音音素开头的，这里表示泛指用不定冠词a根据题意，故选A385 . 句意：当我们到达伦敦的时候，正在下雨。

A. arrived a t到达小地方；过去式；B. get in 进入；C. arrived in 到达大地方；D. got in进入，过去式；根据下文it wasraining.可知上文是到达伦敦的时候，大地方用arrived i n , 这里是过去时态，根据句意，故选C386 . 句意：我们没有英镑，那个银行关门了因此我们不得不走着去旅馆A.hospital 医院；B. bank 银行；C. restaurant 饭馆；D. cinema 电影院；根据上文 We didn'thave any pounds（ 英镑） 和 下 文 so we 7 walk to the hotel.可知是银行关门了故选 B387 . 句意：因此我们不得不走着去旅馆A. could能，会；B. must必须；C. had to不得不；D. need 需要根据上文 We didn't have any pounds（ 英镑） and the 6 wasclosed可知这里是不得不根据题意，故选C388 . 句意：在离开上海之前，我们预定了一个房间A. and和，又；B. o r要不然，否则；C. because 因为；D. before 在. . .之前。

根据下文 but because the hotel didn't ____9 it down（ 记录下） ， they gave us the 10 for £ 100 a night! So we stayedthere 11 . 可知这里是说在离开上海之前根据题意，故选D389 . 句意：但是因为那个旅馆没有把它记录下来A. take带去；B. write写；C. make使，制作；D. say说短语write down表示写下，记下根据下文they gave us the ___10 for £ 100 a night! So we stayed there 11 . 可知上文是没有记录下来根据题意，故选B390 . 句意: 他们给了我们100英镑一晚的房间! A. room房 间 ; B. food食 物 ; C.clothes衣服；D. message消息根据for £ 100 a night!可知这里是是说房间根据题意，故选A391 . 句意：因此我们开心地呆在那里A. quickly快 速 地 ; B. difficultly难地；C.happily 高兴地；D. easily 容易地。

根据上文 they gave us the 10 for £ 100 anight!可知下文是说开心地根据题意，故选C392 . 句意：那儿的天气是凉爽和多云的，正好适合散步A. and和，又；B. but但是；C. so 因此；D. wilh带有，具有这里是并列关系用and根据题意，故选A3 9 3 .句意：那儿的天气是凉爽和多云的，正好适合散步A. walk走：原形；B.walking走，现在分词；C. to walk走，动词不定式；D. walked走一般过去时态根据上文The weather there was cool 12 cloudy可知下文是说适合散步，for+动名词根据句意，故选B394 . 句意: 我们必须出去喝茶了A. get up 起床；B. go out出来；C. grow up长大；D. call back 回根据下文 so I can't 15 you more about it. Give me acall.可知上文是必须出来故选B395 . 句意：因此我不能够告诉你更多的事情，给我打A. say说的内容；B.speak说，语言；C. talk交谈；D. tell告诉，讲述。

根据上文We must 14 foradrink sometime可知下文是告诉某人某事，tell sb. sth.根据题意，故选D【 点睛】技巧一完型在“ 填空” 的时候，切忌用中文的" 搭配" 去感觉，也就是所谓三大出题技巧之一的”中文代入” 要思考英语的搭配，不要死记，要理解和搜集技巧二首段首句不出题，是主旨句（ 2001年除外） ，除首句外基本每句话都要出题，首段首句没有读懂就不要做下去；技巧三考验完型填空里面名词、动词、形容词，这些实词的考点往往被给出明确的线索，存在于改填空的前后，对该填空进行前后联系（ 名词前面adj后面从句; 形容词前面adv后面n.;动词前面主语后面宾语等等） 指示，考生如果能够判断出前后的关键而又是少量的信息，可以保证题目做对技巧四如出现陌生的选项词汇，而我们又不认识的时候，这里注意，蒙也有技巧，一般来说选择相对简单的词汇，不要选择偏的怪的词汇I just spent a wonderful holiday on a little Greek island with my family.One day, my wife and I left the village we lived in to visit the other side of the island.There we saw a lady walking with a cane （ 手杖）. Clearly 396 to climb up the300 steps to an old building. She had a French accent （ 口 音）, so I 397 speakingFrench with her. We had a talk. She said the next day she would visit the 398 welived in at that moment. I hoped to meet her again there because I enjoyed 399 myFrench.Three days later I suddenly met her again at the beach. She told me she was taking theferry boat that night. She was now 400 a place to stay close to the port （ 港 口）because she had difficulty taking her suitcase. She told me a hotel, but it was very401 and I suggested another one. It would cost her less and was a short402 for her to reach the port. 403 , her hotel could not help carry hersuitcase anywhere. So I 404 to carry the suitcase to the port for her.I did help her, and the lady was 405 and kept thanking me. Watching thepleasure on the lady's face, I wished I got the chance to do it more often, for my parentsbrought me up to give others a helping hand.396. A. interestedB. excitedC. tiredD. bored397. A. imaginedB , startedC. endedD. stopped398. A. villageB. countryC. cafeD. hotel399. A. readingB. practisingC. understandingD. copying400. A. looking forB. turning upC. ending upD. caring for401. A. perfectB , wonderfulC. expensiveD. beautiful402. A. flightB. sailC. sightD. walk403. A. CarefullyB. CheerfullyC. HopefullyD. Unluckily404. A. wantedB. disappearedC. forgotD. learned405. A. carefulB. happyC. busyD. worried【 答案】396. C397. B398. A399. B400. A401. C402. D403. D404. A405. B【 导语】本文是一篇记叙文。

主要讲述了作者跟家人在希腊一个小岛上度假， 以及在小岛的另一边与一个法国夫人相遇的故事3 9 6 .句意：爬上300级台阶去一栋旧建筑显然很累interested感兴趣的；excited兴奋的；tired疲倦的；bored无聊的根据“Clearly… toclimb up the 300 steps to an old building.”可知，显然爬上300级台阶去一栋旧建筑是很累的397 . 句意：她有法国口音，因此我开始和她说法语imagined 想象；started 开 始 ; ended 结束；stopped 停止根据"She had a French accent（ 口 音 ）， so I … speaking French with her.”可知, 此处指我听到她有法国口音, 因此开始用法语和她交流398 . 句意：她说第二天她将参观我们当时居住的村庄village 村庄；country 国家；cafe 咖啡馆；hotel 旅馆根据"One day, my with and I leftthe village we lived in to visit the other side of the island."可知，我和我的妻子之前住在岛上的一个村庄，我们离开村庄去参观岛的另一边时看到的这位女士，她是第二天要参观我们当时居住的村庄。

故选A399 . 句意：我希望在那里再次见到她，因为我喜欢练习法语reading 阅读；practising 练习；understanding 理解；copying 复制根据“so I …speaking French with her.”可知，此处指我和她用法语交流，因此这里指是我享受练习法语400 . 句意：她现在正在寻找一个靠近港口的地方，因为她拿手提箱有困难looking for 寻 找 ; turning up 出现；ending up 结束；caring for 关心根据"She told meshe was taking the ferry boat that night."和"because she had difficulty taking her suitcase.She told me a hotel…” 可知，她告诉我她那天晚上要乘渡船，因为拿不动手提箱，所以要找一个靠近港口的地方401 . 句意：她告诉我一家旅馆，但很贵，我建议另一家perfect 完美的; wonderful 绝妙的；expensive 昂贵的；beautiful 美丽的根据“It wouldcost her less and was . . . ” 可知，她告诉我的这家旅馆很贵，于是我告诉她一家便宜的旅馆。

故选C402 . 句意：这会使她花更少的钱，而且对她来说要走很短的路能到达港口flight 航班；sail 航 行 ; sight 景象；walk 行走根据上文“She was now looking fbr aplace to stay close to the port （ 港口）…” 可知，她要找一个靠近港口的旅馆，于是我告诉她一家走很短的路就到达港口的旅馆403 . 句意：不幸地是，她的旅馆不能帮助把她的手提箱搬到任何地方Carefully仔细地；Cheerfully兴奋地；Hopefully有希望地；Unluckily不幸地根据上文“ … because she had difficulty taking her suitcase.“可知，她搬不动她的手提箱，不幸地是旅馆也不能帮她搬手提箱404 .句意: 所以我想帮她把手提箱搬到港口wanted 想 要 ; disappeared 消 失 ; forgot 忘记；learned 学习根据下文“I did help her,and the lady was ... and kept thanking me.”可知，此处是我想要帮她把手提箱搬到港□ o 故选A。

405 . 句意：我确实帮了她，那位女士很高兴，一直感谢我careful 小心 的 ; happy 开 心 的 ; busy 忙碌的；worried 担心的根据"I did help her, ...and kept thanking m e / \此处那位女士因为我帮助了她，所以她很高兴并一直对我表示感谢阅读下列短文， 从每题所给的A,B,C,D四个选项中选出最佳选项， 并涂在答题卡上In the United States there is a special hotel. The hotel lies in a small town 406 thesea. There are not many people living in the town, 407 every year many visitors comeand stay in the special hotel.When you go into the hotel, a waiter and a waitress will give you a 408 . Theprices of the rooms are on it. But each room doesn't have a number. Instead, it gets its namefrom a person in a famous novel（ 小说） . If you choose a 409 such as Holmes, thewaiter will then 410 you a bookmark. And the bookmark is the key 411 theroom.After you open the door, you will feel 4 A . Why? The room is furnished（ 配置）just like you are in the novel and you are working with Holmes. On the clothes tree there isHolmes, hat and his black cloak. On the desk there is a big pipe. It looks as if he left just afew 413 ago and he will come back soon and you can talk, with him. Of course he willnot come back. But you can sit in the room and read some books about Holmes. Ifs very414 、 isn't it?As time goes by, the hotel is getting very 415. You can see people all overthe world in this hotel.406. A. nearB.underC. inD. behind407. A. thenB.butC. andD. after408. A. paperB.pieceC. piece paperD. piece of paper409. A. nameB. numberC. answerD. novel410. A. lendB. giveC. borrowD. make411. A. onB. fromC. withD. to412. A. sadB.surprisedC. unhappyD. afraid413. A. yearsB.monthsC. weeksD. minutes414. A. cheapB. smoothC. interestingD. boring415. A. bigB.smallC. popularD. comfortable【 答案】406. A407. B408. D409. A410. B411. D412. B413. D414. C415. C【 分析】在美国有一家特别的旅馆，这家旅馆靠近大海。

每年很多游客入住这家旅馆这家旅馆的房间名字来自于著名小说中的人物房间按照小说的描述进行了布置406 . 句意：这家旅馆坐落在海边的一个小镇上near在. . .附近；under在. . . . 下；in在. . . . 里；behind在. . . . 后面根据句意及空后“the sea”和选项可知，小镇应该是在海的附近407 . 句意：镇上没有很多人居住，但每年都有许多游客来住在这个特殊的旅馆里then然后；but但是；and和；after在……之后根据空前句“ 镇上住的人不多” 与空后句“ 每年都有许多游客来这家特别的旅馆住” 表转折关系，可知此处应该用but故选Bo408 . 句意：当你走进酒店时，服务员会给你一张纸paper纸；piece张，片根据空前的a 及选项可知，此处是表达一张纸，paper是不可数名词，"一张纸"表达为a piece of paper409 . 句意：如果你选择一个名字，比如福尔摩斯，服务员就会给你一个书签name名字：number数字：answer答案：novel小说根据后面“such as Holmes”可知，此处应该是选择一个名字，故选A410 . 句意：如果你选择一个名字，比如福尔摩斯，服务员就会给你一个书签。

lend借； give给；borrow借；make使根据上句说选择一个名字，可知此处应该是给你一个书签，故选B411 . 句意：书签就是房间的钥匙on在……上；from从；with具有：to 至上根据句意可知，此处是表达“ 书签是房间的钥匙” ，” ……的钥匙” 表达为"the key to...”412 . 句意：当你打开门后，你会感到惊讶sad伤心的；surprised惊讶的；unhappy不开心的；afraid害怕的根据下句“The roomis furnished（ 配置） just like you are in the novel and you are working with Holmes.“可知，房间里家具的配置和小说里的一模一样，就像你在和福尔摩斯在一起工作，这会让人很惊讶，故选B413 . 句意：就像他刚离开几分钟，很快就会回来，你可以和他谈谈years 年；months 月；weeks 周；minutes 分钟根据上句"On the desk there is a big pipe.桌子上有一个大烟斗” 结合语境可知，此处应该是表达时间较短，“ 就像他几分钟前刚离开” 符合语境，故选D。

414 . 句意：很有趣，不是吗？cheap便宜的；smooth光滑的；interesting有趣的；boring无聊的根据上文描述，房间按照小说的描述进行了布置，可知这很有趣，故选C415 . 句意：随着时间的流逝，这家酒店越来越受欢迎big大的；small小的；popular流行的；comfortable舒服的根据下句“You can seepeople all over the world in this hotel.在这家旅馆里你可以看到世界各地的人“ 可知，此处是表达“ 非常流行” ，故选CWe have a big 416 in our school. There are many kinds of books in it. When youwant to 417 some books, you must read the following 418 . It can help you419 the book you want to borrow easily.There is a big 420 on the first floor. There are many 421 in the hall andthere are many 422 on them. When you 423 into the hall, you will see lots ofpicture books for 424 on the first shelf. The story books about 425 andgeography are on the next shelf. There are some books 426 music 427 the leftof the second shelf. Next to it, the books on the shelf are about art.On the 428 floor, there are all kinds of DVDs and CDs. Some of them are for thestudents and some are for the 429 . You can also listen to 430 in the specialrooms there.416.A. parkB.libraryC.studyD. kitchen417.A. lendB. buyC. borrowD. have418.A. oneB.firstc.twoD. second419.A. findB. lookc.wantD. take420.A. hallB. roomc.tableD. desk421.A. bookB. shelvesc.eraserD. food422.A. pensB. bookc.penD. books423.A. comeB. ridec.runD. drive424.A. childrenB. girlsc.boysD. men425.A. EnglishB. Chinesec.historyD. maths426.A. aboutB.forc.andD. of427.A. inB.underc.onD. beside428.A. oneB.firstc.twoD. second429.A. teachersB. parentsc.friendsD. workers430.A. movieB.musicc.foodD. art【 答案】416. B417. C418. B419. A420. A421. B422. D423. A424. A425. C426. A427. C428. D429. A430. B【 导语】本文主要介绍了作者学校里的图书馆。

416 . 句意：我们学校有一个大图书馆park 公园；library 图书馆；study 学习；kitchen 厨房根据"There are many kinds ofbooks in it”可知有很多书的地方应是图书馆，故选B417 . 句意：当你想借书时，你必须先读以下内容lend 借出；buy 买；borrow 借入；have 有根据“the book you want to borrow easily."可知是指借书，故填C418 . 句意：当你想借书时，你必须先读以下内容one一个；firsl 第一；two 第二；second 第二根据“When you want to...some books, youmust read the following”可知应该是指在借书时，要先看以下的内容，故选B419 . 句意：它可以帮助你很容易地找到你想借的书find 找 到 ; look 看；want 想要；take 带走根据"It can help you...the book you want toborrow easily.”结合下文可知图书馆里有很多书，找到自己想要的书不是很容易的，而以下内容可以帮助你轻易找到，故选A。

420 . 句意：一楼有一个大厅hall大厅；room房间；table桌子；desk课桌根据“in the hall”可知指的是大厅, 故选Ao421 . 句意：大厅里有许多架子，架子上也有许多书本book 书；shelves 书架；eraser 橡皮；food 食物根据"in the hall...on the first shelf.“可知在大厅里应该是有很多书架，故选B422 . 句意：大厅里有许多书架，上面有许多书pens钢笔，复数形式；book书；pen钢笔；books书，复数形式根据“When you...intothe hall, you will see lots of picture books”可知图书馆里有很多书，且应用复数，故选Do423 . 句意：当你走进大厅，你会看到许多儿童图画书在第一个书架上come来到；ride骑车；run跑 ; drive开车根据"into the hall”可知应该是走进图书馆大厅，come符合语境，故选A424 . 句意：当你走进大厅，你会看到许多儿童图画书在第一个书架上children儿童；girls女孩；boys男孩；men男人。

根据“picture books”可知图画书是为儿童准备的，故选A425 . 句意：于历史和地理的故事书在下•个书架上English 英语；Chinese 语文；history 历史；maths 数学根据“geography are on the nextshelf. There are some books...music”可知学校图书馆里放的天文地理，历史，艺术音乐之类的书比较多，故选C426 . 句意：在第二层的左边有一些关于音乐的书about 关于；for 为了； and 和；of 属于. . .的根据“There are some books...music”可知此处是指关于音乐的书本，故选A427 . 句意：在第二层的左边有一些关于音乐的书in 在. . .里面；under在. . . . 下面；on在. . . . 上面；beside在. . . . 旁边固定短语onthe left" 在左边” ，故选C428 . 句意：在二楼，有各种各样的DVD和 CDone一个；first 第一；two 二 ; second 第二根据上文“on the first floor”可知此处应该是介绍二楼了，用序数词，故选D。

429 . 句意：有些是给学生的，有些是给老师的teachers老师；parents父母；friends朋友；workers工人根据"students”可知和学生对应的是老师，故选A430 . 句意：你还可以在那里的特殊房间里听音乐movie电影；music音 乐 ; food食 物 ; art艺术根据"listen to”可知是指音乐，故选BoFm Carl. Today is my birthday. My parents, my brother and my friend Ben celebrate （ 庆祝） it for me. 431 say “Happy birthday!to me and give me presents. I have a good432 today.Now, I want to talk about my presents. I get 433 presents. My father 434 amodel plane （ 飞机模型） for me. 435 is it? Do you know? Ifs 10 dollars. My motherbuys me a coat. 436 is it? Do you know? Haha, it's blue. 437 ! A basketball is undermy bed. It's from Ben. I like 438 it. Whafs that on my desk? Oh, it's a(n) 439 book.Ifs from my brother. I can learn English well 440 it.431. A. HeB. SheC. WeD. They432. A. weekB. dayC. pencilD. friend433. A. twoB.threeC. fourD. five434. A. givesB.makesC. buysD. sees435. A. How muchB. WhatC. How oldD. When436. A. WhoB. WhereC. What dayD. What colour437. A. LookB.ListenC. GoD. Think438. A. helpingB. playingC. readingD. cutting439. A. ChineseB.mathsC. EnglishD. picture440. A. ofB.atC. forD. with【 答案】431. D432. B433. C434. C435. A436. D437. A438 . B439. C440. D【 分析】文章大意：本文主要介绍了卡尔自己过生日时收到的生日礼物，以及送礼物的人分别是谁。

431 . 句意：他们对我说生日快乐考查代词及语境理解A .H e他；B.She她；C. We我们；D. They 他们根据 My parents, my brother and my best friend Ben celebrate （ 庆祝）it for me.可知不是一人，所以此处应用T h ey ,故答案选D432 . 句意：今天我过了快乐的一天考查名词及语境理解A week周；B .day天；C.pencil铅笔；D.friend朋友根据上文Today is my birlhday.可知此处为d a y ,故答案选 Bo433 . 句意：我收到了四份礼物考查数词及语境理解A. two二；B. three H ； C.four四；D. five物根据下文爸爸给我买了一个飞机模型，妈妈买了一件外套；本给我一个篮球，哥哥给我一个词典，所以有四份礼物，故答案选C434 . 句意：我父亲给我买了一个飞机模型考查动词及语境理解A. gives给；B.makes制造；C. buys买；D. sees看见buy sth for sb给某人买某物，故答案选C435 . 句意：它多少钱？考查特殊疑问词及语境理解。

A. How much多少钱；B. What什么：C. How old多大；D. When什么时候根据下文It/s 10 dollars.可知这里询问价格的，故答案选A436 . 句意：它是什么颜色？ A. Who谁；B. Where哪里；C. What day什么日子；D.What colour什么颜色根据下文it's blue.可知这里是询问颜色，故答案选D437 . 句意：看，- 一个篮球在我床下考查动词及语境理解A. Look看；B. Listen听；C.G去；D. Think想根据语境，结合选项可知A 选项符合题意，故答案选A438 . 句意: 我喜欢打它考查动词及语境理解A. helping帮助；B. playing玩、打：C. reading 读；D. cutting 割根据上文的 basketball 可知此处应为 playing, playbasketball打篮球，故答案选B439 . 句意：它是- - 本英语书考查形容词及语境理解A. Chinese中国的；B. maths数 学 ; C. English英文的; D. picture图画根据下文I can learn English,可知此处指的是一本英语书，故答案选C。

440 . 句意：我能用它学好英语考查介词及语境理解A. of…的；B .at在；C. for为了； D. with用根据语境，结合选项，可知句意为“ 我能用它学好英语 故答案选Do【 点睛】解答完形填空首先要通读全文，掌握大意结合选项初步弄清短文写了些什么内容在理解全文意思的基础上，结合文章内容对空缺句子作合乎逻辑的推理必须弄清空缺词句的确切含义，空缺词句与其前后句的意义衔接必须自然、合理，最后根据语境，结合选项，选出正确答案如，第 3 小题，联系下文可知作者一共收到了四份礼物，故答案选C第 4 小题，由题干可知考查固定词组buy sth fbr sb“ 给某人买某物' ' ，故答案选C完型填空American students usually get up at seven from Monday to Friday. Then they wash their441 and have breakfast .They usually have eggs, bread, fruit and a glass of milk. Afterbreakfast, most students go to school on foot or 442 school buses. And some students ridebikes .They get to school at about half past eight .Then they put their 443 in theirlockers（ 柜子） and take only a book , a notebook and a pencil to each class 444 classesare English ,writing,math,music,art and so on.At noon American students have lunch at school . They usually 445 meat, vegetables,fruit, bread and a drink. 446 Sometimes they eat pizza, hot dogs and hamburgers . Afterlunch , they go back to have classes until three O'clock .Then t hey.To k e e p ,American students usually do sports before dinner .At six in the evening ,theyhave dinner .The dinner usually has soup ,meat vegetables, rice or pasta. They do theirhomework dinner . Sometimes they watch TV or talk with their parents .Theyfeel 447 but happy after a busy day .441.A. clothesB. facesC. bowlsD. cars442.A. onB. inC. atD. by443.A. schoolbagsB. shoesC. radiosD. vilions444.A. TheirB. ourC. yourD. his445.A. sellB・ haveC. spendD. cook446.A. SoB. OrC. BecauseD. But447.A. go homeB. go shoppingC. go to sleepD. go to movies448.A. healthyB • cleanC. friendlyD. lazy449.A. beforeB. atC. inD. after450.A. heavyB. funnyC. tiredD. cold【 答案】441. B442. A443. A444. A445. B446. D447. A448. A449. D450. C【 分析】试题分析：短文大意：该文介绍了美国学生的•日生活。

441. B 考查名词及语境理解句意：然后，他们洗脸，吃早餐 clothes衣服；faces脸；bowls碗；cars汽车根据生活常识可知该选B442. A 考查介词及语境理解句意：早餐后，大多数学生步行或乘校车上学 on在 上；in 在. . . . 里；a t在；by乘on school buses乘校车，是一个固定短语，所以选A443. A 考查名词及语境理解句意：然后他们把他们的书包放在他们的储物柜里，每节课上只拿一本书，一个笔记本和一支铅笔 schoolbags书包；shoes鞋；radios无线电；vilions 小提琴联系 take only a book , a notebook and a pencil to each class . 可知该选 A444. A 考查物主代词及语境理解句意：他们的课有英语、写作、数学、音乐和艺术等 Their他 们 的 ; our我们的; your你的，你们的；his他的根据句意结合语境可知该选Ao445. B 考查动词及语境理解句意：他们通常有肉、蔬菜、水果、面包和饮料Sell出售；have有，吃；spend花费；cook做饭，烹饪。

根据句意结合语境可知该选B446. D 考查连词及语境理解句意：但有时他们吃比萨饼，热狗和汉堡包So所以；O r或者；Because因为；But但是前后句子之间是转折关系，所以选D447. A 考查动词短语及语境理解句意：然后他们回家go home回家；go shopping去购物；go to sleep去睡觉；go to movies去看电影根据句意结合语境可知该选A448. A 考查形容词及语境理解句意：为了保持健康，美国学生通常在晚饭前做运动healthy健 康 的 ; clean干 净 的 ; friendly友 好 的 ; lazy懒惰的根据Americanstudents usually do sports before dinner 可知该选 A449. D 考查介词及语境理解句意：他们在晚饭后做家庭作业Before在……之前；a t在；in 在. . .里；after在. . . . 后联系前面的句子Americanstudents usually do sports before dinner 可知 该选 Do450. C 考查形容词及语境理解句意：他们会在忙碌一天之后感到累但是很快乐。

Heavy重的； funny有趣的；tired累的；cold冷的根据生活常识可知该选C考点：日常生活类短文My brother Jerry is a clerk at a clothes store. His work is to help the customers to choosethe clothes and sell them as 451 as possible. He works very 452 hours every day.He usually 453 at six in the morning. After he 454 his teeth, he keeps 455 forthirty minutes. He thinks doing sports is 456 for his health. Then he has breakfast. Afterbreakfast, he 457 a bus to work. He is very busy. He has no time 458 home forlunch, so he eats it at the store. In the afternoon, he works for four hours. He has dinner athome. On weekends he always has two days off, so he doesn't feel as 459 as he is onweekdays. He usually finds some free time and goes to the movies 460 me. Both of usthink it is relaxing and are fond of it very much.451.A. manyB.muchC. feelD. little452.A. longB. bigC. shortD. small453.A. goes homeB. gets upC. goes to workD. eats breakfast454.A. brushB. brushedC. brushesD. brushing455.A. speakingB. readingC. singingD. running456.A. happyB. goodC. funD. difficult457.A. takesB. bringsC. buysD. sells458.A. goB. goesC. goingD. to go459.A. busyB. freeC. interestingD. tiring460.A. atB. withC. forD. and【 答案】451. A452.A453.B454.C455.D456.B457.A458.D459.A460.B【 分析】试题分析：本文介绍的是服装店工作职员杰瑞的日常生活。

他周日上班，工作时间长，很忙，但是周末不忙，经常和作者一起去看电影451 . 句意：他的工作是帮助顾客选择衣服并尽可能多地出售A. many许多，修饰可数名词；B. much许多，修饰不可数名词；C. feel感觉D. little极少，修饰不可数名词尽可能多地销售衣服，many修饰clothes,故答案为A452 . 句意：他每天工作很长时间A. long长的，B. big大的；C. short短的；D. small小的由下文可知，他早上起得早，中午没有时间回家吃饭，平时很忙说明他工作时间长，故选A453 . 句意：他通常早上六点起床A. goes home回家；B. gets up起床；C. goes tow ork上班；D. eats breakfast吃早餐由下文可知，这是在早餐前的活动可以推测出是起床454 . 句意：他刷牙后，坚持跑步三十分钟A. brush动词原形；B. brushed动词过去式；C. brushes动词三单式；D. brushing分词或动名词根据上下句判断，此句是一般现在时，主语h e是第三人称单数，动词用三单式，故答案为C455 .句 意 :他刷牙后，坚持跑步三十分钟。

A. speaking说，说话；B. reading阅读；C. singing唱歌；D. running跑步根据下文“ 运动有利身体健康” ，可知是每天坚持跑步 30分钟，答案为D456 . 句意：他认为运动有益于他的健康A. happy高兴的；B. good好的；C. fun有趣的；D. difficult困难的他每天早上坚持跑步，所以他认为跑步对身体有益对……有好处：be good foro 故选 B457 . 句意：早餐过后，他坐公交去上班A. takes拿走，带走；乘坐；B. brings带来，拿来；C. buys购买；D. sells销售坐公交：take a bus故答案选A458 . 句意：他没有时间回家吃午餐A. go动词原形；B. goes动词三单式；C. going分词或动名词；D. to g o 动词不定式have no lime to do sth.没有时间做某事故答案为 D459 . 句意：所以他不像平时那么忙A. busy忙碌的；B. free空闲的；C. interesting W趣的；D. tiring使人疲劳的根据前面的句子On weekends he always has two days off可知，杰瑞周末不上班，不像上班那样忙，故答案为A。

460 . 句意：他通常找些空闲时间和我一起去看电影A. a t在某点；B. with和……一起，带有，具有；C. for为. . .；D. And而且，并且，表示并列with sb和某人一起，故答案选B 点睛】完形填空题与单项选择题不同，它给出的是一篇意思较为完整的短文做该题型试题时，首先应跳过空格通读全文，以全文为背景，联系句子的上下文进行推理和判断，从 4 个选项中选出一项进行试填考生可以从词义用法、固定搭配、逻辑推理和上下文的联系等方面去考虑最后应再把全文通览一遍，细心检查所选答案能否使短文上下连贯，前后呼应，词句通顺，使短文意思完整检查时还应从语法、惯用法、逻辑推理和事情发生的情节等方面进行考虑，以达到准确无误之目的例如第9小题是考查形容词词义辨析，结合上下句“On weekends he always has two days ofT和“He usually finds some free time and goes to the movies with me.”可知，杰瑞周末不上班，不像平时那么忙，总是能找到时间和我一起去看电影，故答案为AAre you the only child in your family? Do you want to have a younger sister or brother?Well, having a new 461 in your family is really special. But please be careful whenyou 462 the baby.Always ask your parents 463 you do anything for the baby, and they will showyou 464 to look after your new brother or sister. For example, don*t give salt or sugarto new babies, these things are not good for 465 .Your mum will be 466 if the new baby wakes a lot during the night. You can dosomething nice to help, like bringing her some 467 when she is thirsty.You may feel a little bit jealous （ 嫉妒的） of the baby sometimes. Don't think that you area "bad person^^. In fact, it is natural to have such 468 . There is one more child in yourfamily, 469 your parents still love you as usual.The most 470 thing is that you should try to be friendly to your brother orsister. In the future, he or she will help you in many ways.Now do you look forward to having a younger brother or sister?461. A. petB. carC. babyD. friend462. A. laugh atB.look forC. take care ofD. get ready for463. A. becauseB. beforeC. afterD. than464. A. whatB.howC. whenD. where465. A. meB. youC. usD. them466. A. boredB. lazyC. tiredD. excited467. A. waterB. breadC. flowersD. clothes468. A. habitsB.feelingsC. activitiesD. chances469. A. orB.soC. andD. but470. A. importantB. comfortableC. terribleD. interesting【 答案】461. C462. C463. B464. B465. D466. C467. A468. B469. D470. A【 分析】本文主要讲了在中国大多数家庭只有一个孩子，如果家里有个新宝宝真的很特别，并对你应该怎样照顾你的弟弟或妹妹给出了建议，不要认为父母只爱他们，你的父母依然爱你。

461 . 句意：家里有一个新婴儿真的很特别pet 宠 物 ; car 汽车；baby 婴儿；friend 朋友根据空前“Do you want to have a youngersister or brother?”及空2 后的“the baby”可知，此处是说“ 婴儿"the babyo故选C462 . 句意：当你照看婴儿的时候一定要小心laugh a t 嘲笑；look fo r寻找；take care o f 照看；get ready for准备好根据空前“please be careful when you”及空 4 后的“to look after your new brother or sister.“可知，此处是表达“ 照看” ，结合选项可知用take care of463 . 句意：在你为宝宝做任何事情之前，一定要问问你的父母because因为；before在. . .之 前 ; after在. . . . 之后；than比根据空前“Always askyour parents”及空后"you do anything for the baby”可知，空处是以before引导的时间状语从句。

故选B464 . 句意：他们会教你如何照顾你的新弟弟或妹妹what什么；how如何；w hen何时；where明 B 儿根据空后的"look after your newbrother or sister”可知，动词look after有宾语，所以排除选项A；结合后面“Forexample, don't give salt or sugar to new babies”可知，空处不是说时间和地点，而是方式，应该用how465 . 句意：例如，不要给新生儿盐或糖，这些东西对他们不好me 我；you 你，你们；us 我们；them 他们根据空前“dorft give salt or sugar to newbabies”可知，空处是代指new babies,应该用them466 . 句意：如果宝宝晚上经常醒，你妈妈会很累的bored 烦的；lazy 懒惰的；tired 累的；excited 兴奋的根据空后“if the new baby wakesa lot during the night如果宝宝晚上经常醒” 结合选项可知，空处说“ 妈妈会很累” 符合语境467 . 句意：你可以做些好事来帮助她，比如在她渴的时候给她水喝。

water 水；bread 面包；flowers 花；clothes 衣服根据空后的"when she is thirsty”可知，空处说“ 给她水喝” 符合语境468 . 句意：其实，有这样的感觉是很自然的habits 习惯；feelings 感觉，感受；activities 活动；chances 机会根据前面“You mayfeel a little bit jealous （ 嫉妒的） of the baby sometimes”可知, 空处是说前面提到的“ 感觉” 469 . 句意：你家里又多了一个孩子，但你的父母仍然像往常一样爱你o r或者；so所以；and并且；but但是根据空前句子“There is one more child in yourfhmily”及空后句子“your parents still love you as usual”可知，前后两句存在转折关系，所以空处应该用but470 . 句意：最重要的是你应该尽力对你的弟弟或妹妹友好important重要的；comfortable舒服的；terrible可怕的；interesting有趣地根据空后“you should try to be friendly to your brother or sister."可知，“ 对你的弟弟或妹妹友好” 应该是最重要的事情，结合选项可知，应该用important。

故选AMonday, September 26thToday was Career•（ 职业） Day at school. The school 471 it every year to get uskids to start thinking about our future. Some students' parents came to our school. They havedifferent jobs. 472 told us what their jobs were like.The teacher 473 us to fill out a form （ 填写表格） on the computer. It helped topredict （ 预测） what kind of job we 474 . When I finished, I got “Artist" on my form.Well, that can't be true, 475 I'm not interested in art at all.Some other kids were unhappy with their jobs, 476 . For example, Edward got“Driver”, my friend Cindy got “ Actress”, 477 Bob got “ Farmer^^.My best friend Rowley got “Teacher“ on his form, and he seemed 478 about it.Nancy, Kate and Jack 479 "Teacher”, too. They had a great talk with Rowley.480 said he wanted to be a history teacher, because he thought it was veryinteresting. It made me surprised. I know Rowley is not good at 481 at all.Cindy told me that she would sit next 482 one of those “Teacher“ girls nexttime and copy （ 抄袭） their answers. I don't think that is a 483 idea, because theteacher said we shouldn't take these things too seriously.Well, I had 484 interesting day today. At least I got to know much more aboutdifferent 485 .471. A. have B. planned C. has D. organized472. A. WeB. TheyC. TheirD. Our473. A. is askingB. will askC. asksD. asked474. A. could doB. will haveC. couldn't doD. won't have475. A. whyB. ifC. whenD. because476. A. tooB. alsoC. howeverD. though477. A. butB. soC. andD. or478. A. sadB. happyC. unhappyD. upset479. A. getB. haveC. gotD. had480. A. CindyB. RowleyC. EdwardD. Kate481. A. artB. historyC. musicD. geography482. A. inB. toC. ofD. at483. A. goodB. wellC. betterD. best484. A. theB. aC. anD. /485. A. dreamsB. subjectsC. teamsD. jobs【 答案】471. C472. B473. D474. B475. D476. A477. C478. B479. C480. B481. B482. B483. A484. C485. D【 分析】本文主要是以一篇日记的形式介绍了作者在学校过了有趣的一天，这天让他们了解到不同的职业。

471 . 句意：学校每年都会举办这样的活动让我们这些孩子开始思考我们的未来have举行；planned计划；has举行；organized计划根据“every year”可知，句子是一般现在时，主语是单数形式，动词用三单形式，故选C472 . 句意：他们告诉我们他们的工作是什么样的We我们；They他 们 ; Their他们的；Our我们的此空指代前文提到的Some students，parents,且此空在句中作主语，故选B473 . 句意：老师让我们在电脑上填写一张表格is asking现在进行时；will ask一般将来时；asks动词三单形式；asked动词过去式根据“It helped to predict （ 预测） what kind of job”可知，句子是一般过去时，动词用过去式，故选D474 . 句意：它有助于预测我们将从事什么样的工作could do可以做；will have将有；couldn't do不可以做；won't have不将有根据“predict （ 预测） what kind of job we ” 可知，预测将来从事什么工作，用•般将来时willd o 的结构, 故选B。

475 . 句意：因为我对艺术一点也不感兴趣why 为什么；if 如果；when 何时；because 因为根据“When I finished, I got “Artist” onmy form. Well, that can't be true”可知，空格所在句子是解释前面为什么根本不能实现，用 because引导原因状语从句，故选D476 . 句意：其他一些孩子也对他们的工作不满意too也，用在肯定句句末；also也，用在肯定句句中；however然而；though尽管根据“Some other kids were unhappy with their jobs”可知，也对自己的工作不满意，此空位于肯定句句末，故选A477 . 句意：例如，爱德华得到了“ 司机” ，我的朋友辛迪得到了“ 演员” ，鲍勃得到了“ 农民” but但是；so 因此；and和；o r或者前后文是并列关系，故选C478 . 句意：他似乎对它很满意sad难过的；happy满意的；unhappy不满意的；upset沮丧的根据“he wanted to be ahistory teacher”可知，对“ 教师” 这个预测很满意，故选B。

479 . 句意：南希，凯特和杰克也得到了“ 老师” get得到，动词原形；have有，动词原形；got得到，动词过去式；had有，动词过去式根据“got “Teacher” on his form”可知，在这个表格上得了有关职业的预测，且描述过去发生的事情，句子用一般过去式，故选C480 . 句意：罗利说他想当历史老师Cindy 辛迪；Rowley 罗利；Edward 爱德华；Kate 凯特根据"I know Rowley is notgood at”可知，罗利想当老师, 故选B481 . 句意：我知道罗利根本不擅长历史art 艺术；history 历 史 ; music 音乐；geography 地理根据"he wanted to be a historyteacher"及“It made me surprised”可知，不擅长历史，所以想成为一名历史老师让作者感到惊讶，故选B482 . 句意：辛迪告诉我，下次她会坐在那些“ 老师” 女孩的旁边抄她们的答案in 在. . .里；to 到；of.…… 的；a t在nextto“ 紧挨着” , 故 选 B483 . 句意：我认为那不是一个好主意。

good好的；well好地；better更好；best最好此空修饰名词id ea ,要用形容词作定语，且无比较之意，故选A484 .句意: 我今天过得很有趣the这个/ 那个；a 一个，用于以辅音音素开头的单词前；an一个，用于以元音音素开头的单词前；/ 不填此空表示“ 有趣的一天” ，表泛指，且 interesling是以元音音素开头的单词，故选C485 . 句意：至少我对不同的工作有了更多的了解dreams 梦想；subjects 学科；teams 团队；jobs 工作根据"They have differentjobs.... told us what their jobs were like”可知，是对不同的工作职业有了 了解，故选DDavid and Ann come from the UK. There are four people in 486 family. Theyare in 487 now. David is a doctor. He works in Beijing. Ann doesn't work. She is488 and does some housework（ 家务） . Their 489 、Amy, is a student. Jack,their son, is a 490 . too. They are in the same 491 . but in different classes.Every morning Ann 492 for the family. They like Chinese food （ 食物）very much.Ann can cook 493 、 so they can have Chinese food at home every day.The Chinese 494 are kind （ 友好的）to them. They 495 China alot. The family have a happy life （ 生活）in China.486.A.ourB.theirC.herD. his487.A.EnglandB. AmericaC.ChinaD. Cuba488.A.at homeB. on the farmc.at schoolD. in the office489.A. cousinB. sonc.brotherD. daughter490. A. teacherB. studentC.doctorD. worker491. A. schoolB.familyC.classD. office492. A. doesB. cooksc.showsD. helps493. A. wellB.finec.niceD. good494. A. kidsB.workersc.farmersD. people495. A. visitB. livec.loveD. give【 答案】486. B487. C488. A489. D490. B491. A492. B493. A494. D495. C【 分析】本文介绍了大卫和安来自英国，他们一家有四口人，现在他们在北京生活。

中国人对他们非常友好，他们非常爱中国486 . 句意：他们家有四口人our 我们的；their 他们的；her 她的；his 他的根据“David and Ann come fix） m the UK.”可知，此处指大卫和安的家，因此用their修饰fam ily,故选B487 . 句意：现在他们在中国England英国；America美国；China中国；Cuba古巴根据后文的“He works inBeijing.”可知，他们在中国, 故选C488 . 句意：她在家做家务at home在 家 ; on the farm在农场上；at school在 学 校 ; in the office在办公室根据“and does some housework（ 家务） . ” 可知，她在家做家务，故选A489 . 句意：他们的女儿，艾米，是一名学生cousin 表亲；son 儿子；brother 兄弟；daughter 女儿根据"Amy"和"Jack, their son, isa..., too.”可知，艾米是女孩，因此表示艾米是他们的女儿，故选D490 . 句意：他们的儿子杰克也是一名学生。

teacher 教师；student 学生；doctor 医生；worker 工人根据"Their…, Amy, is astudent.”和“too”可知，杰克也是一名学生，故选B491 . 句意：他们在同一所学校，但是在不同的班级school 学校；family 家庭；class 班级；office 办公室根据"but in different classes.“可知，他们在不同的班级，因此表示在同一所学校，故选A492 . 句意：每天早上安为家人做饭does 做；cooks 做饭；shows 展 示 ; helps 帮助根据后文的“They like Chinese food （ 食物）very much.“可知，此处表示做饭，故选B493 . 句意：安厨艺很好，所以他们每天在家都能吃到中国菜well很好，副词；fine好的，形容词；nice美好的，形容词；good好的，形容词修饰动词co o k ,用副词，故选A494 . 句意：中国人民对他们很友好kids孩子；workers工人；farmers农民；people人根据句意，表示中国人对他们友好，故选D495 . 句意：他们非常爱中国。

visit 参观；live 居住；love 喜爱；give 给根据后文的“The family have a happy life （ 生活）in China.”可知，他们在中国过着快乐的生活，因此他们爱中国，故选CPeople in England 496 the USA celebrate Mother's Day every year. On that day,children give flowers and 497 cards to their mothers. They also make or buy presentsfor their mothers. 498 and children make breakfast, and children serve （ 服务） it totheir mothers 499 .People celebrated Mother's Day first 500 10th May, 1908 in the USA. A womannamed Anna Jarvis wanted people to spend one day 501 their love to their mothers.Many other women tried to start a 502 day for mothers, but Anna Jarvis madeMother's Day famous and popular.However, in 1923, Anna Jarvis tried to 503 Mother's Day! She found thatbusinessmen tried to make a lot of money from people's celebration of Mother's Day and shethought that was wrong. She would like to look for a new way to 504 it. She wantedpeople to spend less money buying things and more time telling their mothers about their505 .496. A. andB. butC. orD. all497. A. ChristmasB. Teachers? DayC. May DayD. Mother's Day498. A. FathersB. MothersC. BrothersD. Sisters499. A. at bedB. in bedC. on bedD. by bed500. A. onB. atC. inD. of501. A. showingB. showedC. showD. shows502. A. goodB. busyC. specialD. difficult503. A. studyB , stopC. helpD. start504. A. celebratedB. spendC. celebrateD. spends505. A. helpB. loveC. visitD. call【 答案】496. A497. D498. A499. B500. A501. A502. C503. B504. C505. B【 导语】本文主要介绍了母亲节，包括起源、发展以及在这一天如何向母亲表达爱意。

496 . 句意：英国人和美国人每年都庆祝母亲节and和；but但是；o r或者；all所有结合语境和常识可知英美两国都有母亲节，所以这里用并列连词and497 . 句意：在那一天，孩子们送花和母亲节贺卡给他们的母亲Christmas 圣诞节；Teachers9 Day 教师节；May Day 劳动节；Mother's Day 母亲节结合语境可知本文介绍的是母亲节，应该送母亲节卡片498 . 句意：父亲和孩子们做早餐，孩子们把早餐端到床上给妈妈吃Fathers父亲；Mothers母亲；Brothers兄弟；Sisters姐妹根据常识可知兄弟姐妹也属于孩子，结合空后“and children make breakfast”可知在母亲节这一天，应该是爸爸和孩子们一起给妈妈做早餐499 . 句意：父亲和孩子们做早餐，孩子们把早餐端到床上给妈妈吃at bed表述不妥；in bed窝在床上；on bed在床上，强调的是人或物的位置；by bed表述不妥结合语境和空前“children serve （ 服务） it to their mothers”可知母亲节这一天，妈妈不用早起做早餐，孩子们把做好的早餐端给还在床上被褥里的妈妈，妈妈可以在床上吃早餐，所以这里用固定短语in bed。

故选B500 . 句意：在美国，人们最先在1908年 5 月 10日庆祝母亲节on后接具体某一天；a t后接具体的时间点；in后接世纪、年、月、季节等；of……的结合语境和空后“10th May, 1908”可知在1908年 5 月 10号这一天前时间介词用on故选Ao501 . 句 意 : 一位名叫Anna Jarvis的女性希望人们用一天的时间向母亲表达他们的爱showing动名词或现在分词；showed动词的过去式或过去分词：show动词原形；shows动词三单结合语境和空前“spend one day”可知本句用“spend...doing sth花时间做某事“ ，所以这里用动名词502 . 句意：许多其他女性试图为母亲设立一个特殊的日子，但 Anna Jarvis使母亲节出名并受欢迎good好的；busy忙碌的；special特殊的；difficult困难的结合语境和常识可知许多其他女性也希望专门有一个节日来向母亲表达爱意，不同于往常的特殊一天故选Co503 . 句意：然而，在 1923年，Anna Jarvis试图中断母亲节！study学习；stop停止，中断；help帮助；start开始。

结合语境和后- - 句“She fbund thatbusinessmen tried to make a lot of money from people's celebration of Mother's Day and shethought that was wrong."可知Anna Jarvis发现商人试图从人们庆祝母亲节的活动中牟利，她认为此举不对，因此想中断母亲节504 . 句意：她想寻找一种新的方式来庆祝它celebrated庆祝，动词的过去式或过去分词；spend花费，动词原形；celebrate庆祝，动词原形；spends花费，动词三单分析句子结构可知，空前有动词不定式符号“to”，所以这里用动词原形，排除选项A 和 D：根据上下文“She found that businessmen triedto make a lot of money from people's celebration of Mother's Day …'' 和"She wanted peopleto spend less money buying things and more time telling their mothers about their…” 可知Anna Jarvis不愿商家趁机牟利，希望人们能用少花钱、多陪伴的方式来庆祝母亲节。

故选Co5 0 5 .句意：她希望人们少花钱买东西，多花时间向母亲表达他们的爱help帮助；love热爱；visit参观，拜访；call通话结合语境和第二段中“A womannamed Anna Jarvis wanted people to spend one day showing their love to their mothers.“可知Anna Jarvis设立母亲节的初衷是希望人们能花时间向母亲表达爱意Coconut Island is a beautiful island with, of course, coconut palms（ 椰子树） ， goldenbeaches and clear blue sea. Fm sorry. I made a 506 there. Coconut Island was abeautiful island. There are still coconut palms, golden beaches and clear blue sea but not likebefore. So, what happened?Well, I have a friend who was here five years ago. Her photo album is full of wonderfulpictures of empty beaches. Also she has pictures of small wooden bungalows （ 小屋） on thebeach. "No need to book,^^ she said, “just 507 and you have the place to yourself-very basic, cheap, quiet and peaceful.^^Not anymore! The beach is 508 empty -it's crowded all day! There is musicfrom the cafes. Children are shouting and screaming, and the hotels are very expensive. Mostof the hotels are full of holidaymakers who booked their trips months ago. I'm lucky to have asmall room at the back of one hotel, and it's still expensive.But perhaps this is 509 ? Not only are the roads better but there is also a newmedical clinic. The local kids now speak English "Mister. Mister, you want T-shirt?" andthere are many new businesses opening all the time. 510 I see an old woman tryingto cross the road from her house to the shops. It's no longer a small, quiet road but a large andvery busy one. She looks nervous and waits for someone to walk with her. The children nolonger ride bicycles but race around the island on motorbikes. Its not so 511 either-my friend stayed in a bungalow on the beach that had no lock. Now the hotel room says it*s agood idea to put things in the safe box.Are things getting better or worse?506. A. decisionB. noiseC. livingD. mistake507. A. show upB. look upC. fly upD. put up508. A. evenB. neverC. everD. also509. A. dangerB. historyC. progressD. experience510. A. LastB. AgainC. SlowlyD. Then511. A. comfortableB. terribleC. safeD. boring【 答案】506. D507. A508. B509. C510. D511. C【 分析】本文介绍的椰子岛是一个美丽的岛屿，椰子树、金色的海滩和湛蓝的大海。

五年后发生了巨大的变化，空荡而幽静的海滩变得热闹而拥挤，道路更好了，还有一个新的诊所，但旅馆住宿费用高了，而且也不如之前那样安全.506 . 句意: 我在那儿犯了一个错误decision决定；noise噪音；living生活：mistake错误根据前一句‘Tm sorry.”和下文“There are still coconut palms, golden beaches and clear blue sea but not like befbre.“可知作者道歉了，椰子岛和五年前大不一样了，而作者是从朋友那里了解的关于椰子岛五年前的情况，所以作者犯了个错误507 . 句意：“ 不需要预定，” 她说，“ 只要出现在那儿，你就有地方——简单基本、便宜幽静show up出现，露面；look up查阅；fly up飞起；put up举起，建造根据空前“Noneed to book…” 可知五年前的椰子岛空荡人少，只要去了，无需预定，都会有地方故选 Ao508 . 句意：海滩不再空荡，全天都很拥挤even甚至；never从不；ever曾经；also也根据下——句"it's crowded all day!”可矢口五年后，椰子岛的海滩上整天都很拥挤，不再空荡。

故选B509 . 句意: 但这或许是一种进步？danger危险；history历史：progress进步，发展；experience经验根据接下来两句“Not only are the roads better but there is also a new medical clinic…”可知椰子岛五年后道路变好了，还有新的诊所以及许多新的企业等，这些似乎都是发展的表现5 1 0 .句意：然后我看到一位老妇人试图从她家过马路去商店Last上次，最后；Again再一次，又；Slowly缓慢地；Then然后结合句意和语境可知，作者接下来看到的是老妇人试图过马路5 1 1 .句意：这也不太安全——我朋友住在海滩上的一间没有锁的木屋里comfortable舒服的；terrible可怕的；safe安全的；boring无聊的根据下一句“Nowthe hotel room says ifs a good idea to put things in the safe box.”可知酒店都建议把东西放进保险箱，所以这里现在也不是很安全二、阅读单选I'm in the lost-and-found office （ 失物招领处）of my school. I help Mr. Green here.Students found some things in the school, and they put （ 放）them here. For example, here is apurple notebook. Tim from Class 2, Grade 8 found it in the library. L inda from Class 1, Grade7 found a yellow key. L ily from Class 2, Grade 9 found an English dictionary.Some students lost things in the school. They come to the lost-and-found office for help.Bill lost his black jacket. Tina lost her pen. Wendy lost her schoolbag. Some books and her IDcard are in it. Eric lost his computer game.Some students can find their lost things here. Tm very happy to help them.512. Mr. Green works （ 工作）inA. the libraryB . the student officeC.the lost-and-fbundoffice513. Who found a purple notebook?A. L inda.B.Tim.C.L ily.514. What class is L ily in?A. Class 1, Grade 7 .B.Class 2, Grade 8.C.Class 2, Grade 9 .515. Tina lost aA. keyB.penC.dictionary516. What are in Wendy's lost schoolbag?①books©pencils ③a pencil box④an ID cardA. ①②B . ①④C.③④【 答案】512. C513.B514.C515.B516. B【 分析】这篇短文讲述的是作者在失物招领处帮助格林先生工作。

失物招领处里有很多学生们捡到的东西，丢失东西的同学可以来这里认领512 . 推理判断题根据"I'm in the lost-and-found office （ 失物招领处） of my school. Ihelp Mr. Green here.”可知，格林先生在失物招领处工作，故选C513 . 细节理解题根据"here is a purple notebook. Tim from Class 2, Grade 8 found it inthe library.”可知，Tim找到了一个紫色的笔记本，故选B514 . 细节理解题根据“Lily from Class 2, Grade 9 found an English dictionary.”可知，莉莉来自九年级二班，故选C515 . 细节理解题根据“Tina lost her pen.”可知，Tina丢了她的钢笔，故选B516 . 细节理角军题根据"Wendy lost her schoolbag. Some books and her ID card are in it.”可知，Wendy丢了书包，里面有一些书和她的身份证，故选BI'm John. This is Mike, my good friend. We are in the same class.Mike likes sports and he is in the school football team （ 足球队）. To stay healthy（ 保持健康）， he doesn't eat the fbod with too much sugar or fat （ 糖或脂肪）in it.So what does Mike often eat? Lefs have a look!TimeFoodAt 7: 30 (Breakfast)an egg juice, bread / baoziAt 10:00one appleAt 12:30 (Lunch)vegetable soup( 汤) , chicken / beef ( 牛肉) , rice / noodlesAt 16:00three oranges / two bananasAt 18:30 (Dinner)vegetables and fishAt 21:30milk517 . Mike is J o h n ' s . A. teacher B. classmate C. brotherD. cousin518 . Mike doesn't eat for breakfast.A. bread B. baozi C. an egg D. jiaozi519 . Mike has an apple at.A. 10:00B. 12:30C. 16:00D. 9:30520. What does Mike like to have for dinner?521. What can we know about Mike from the material （ 材料）？A. He is fat.B. He has juice in the evening.C. He eats healthy food.D. He doesn't Hke football.【 答案】517. B518. D519. A520. B521. C【 导语】本文是一篇应用文，主要讲约翰的朋友迈克的饮食。

5 1 7 .细节理解题根据“This is Mike, my good fHend."及“We are in the same class.“可知迈克和约翰在同一个班，可知他们是同班同学，故选B5 1 8 .细节理解题根据表格中“an egg, juice, bread/baozi”可知迈克早餐吃鸡蛋，果汁，面包或包子，故不吃的是饺子5 1 9 .细节理解题根据“At 10:00 one apple”可知在10点吃了苹果, 故选A5 2 0 .细节理解题根据“vegetables and fish”可知迈克晚餐吃蔬菜和鱼，故选B5 2 1 .推理判断题根据迈克的饮食可知他吃水果，蔬菜和鱼，并喝牛奶，是很健康的，故选CMason's Clothing StoreClothes （ 衣服）Color （ 颜色）Price （ 价格）sockswhite, blue$4pantsblack$11sweater （ 毛衣）red, white$8T-shirtred, green, black$7hatblack, red$6522. Which are the cheapest （ 最便宜的）ofall?A. Hats.B. T-shirts.C. Pants.D. Socks.523. How much are two sweaters and a hat?A. $14. B. $20.C. $21.D. $22.524. You only have sixteen dollars. You can bu：A. a sweater and a pair of （ - 一 条）pantsy _________ •B. two T-shirts and a pair of （ 一双）socksC. a sweater and two pairs of socksD. two hats and a T-shirt525. What color are the pants?A. White. B. Blue.C. Black.D. Red.526. Which have the most （ 最多的）colors?A. Hats. B. T-shirts.C. Pants.D. Sweaters.【 答案】522. D523. D524. C525. C526. B【 分析】本文介绍了梅森服装店里衣服的颜色及相应的价格。

522 . 细节理解题根据表格中价格一栏可知，袜子是最便宜的，故选D523 .细节理解题根据表格可知一件毛衣8 美元，一顶帽子6 美元，所以两件毛衣和一顶帽子是22美元，故选D524 . 细节理解题根据表格中价格一栏可知，一件毛衣和两双袜子共计16美元，故选 Co525 . 细节理解题根据表格可知裤子是黑色的，故选C526 . 细节理解题根据表格可知T 恤衫有三种颜色，是颜色最多的，故选BHi, I'm Jane! I'm a twelve-year-old girl. I have a brother. He's ten. His name is John. Wehave different hobbies.I like watching TV very much. I have a small TV in my room. I like watching baseballgames on TV. I think they're relaxing. And I like carrots and eggs, too. I think they are goodfor me.John likes playing computer games. He thinks they're great fun, but I think they'reboring. John doesn9t like fruit. He likes ice cream. And he likes hamburgers, too. But I don'tlike junk food. I don't think they're healthy. I don't eat them.527. Jane is John' s.A. friendB. sisterC. cousinD. brother528. The underlined （ 戈 U 线的） word "junk" means （ 意思是）.A . 垃圾 B . 营养 C . 美味 D. 保健529. Jane likes watching games on TV.A. football B. basketball C. baseball D. tennis530. John thinks computer games areA. boring B. difficult531. From the passage, we know.A. Jane likes playing computer gamesC. John likes playing baseballC. useful D. funB. Jane likes healthy foodD. John thinks watching TV is great fun【 答案】527. B528. A529. C530. D531. B【 分析】本文是一篇记叙文。

文章主要介绍了 Jane和她的弟弟John的爱好527 . 细节理解题根据文章第一段中的"I have a brother. He's ten. His name is John”可知 , Jane是 John的姐姐，故选B°528 . 词句猜测题根据文章最后一段中的"I don't think they're healthy”可推知，junkfood是“ 垃圾食品” 的意思，故选A529 . 细节理解题根据文章第二段中的"I like watching baseball games on TV”可知，Jane喜欢在电视上看棒球比赛，故选Co5 3 0 . 细节理解题根据文章最后一段中的“John likes playing computer games. He thinksthey're great fim”可知，John认为电脑游戏很有趣，故选D531. 推理判断题根据文章第二段中的“And I like carrots and eggs, too. I think they aregood for me”可推知，Jane喜欢健康的食物，故选BBrush and Hgyour根据材料内容选择最佳答案。

532. You should in the morning.A. eat breakfast B. drink 3 liters of water C. take a short napD. wake up late533. You should take a break from your computer every 2 hours.A. 3 timesB . 4 timesC. 5 timesD. 6 times534. Before going to sleep, it is healthier to.A. watch TV B. exercise C. play with your phoneD. read books535. Going to bed before 10 pm is.A. too late B. too early C. healthy D. lazy536. Where is the text probably from?A. News report. B. A storybook. C. A poster. D. A healthmagazine.【 答案】532. A533. B534. D535. C536. D【 分析】本文通过图片和文字提示，讲述了一天中健康的作息时间安排。

5 3 2 .细节判断题根据第一排第二个图片“Eat your breakfast”可知早上吃早饭；根据第一排第三个图片“'Drink 3 liters of water a day”可知B 选项错误；根据第二排第二个图片“Take a short nap”是下午时间，不是在早上，所以C 选项错误；根据第一排第一个图片“Wake up early in the morning”可知,D 选项错误故选 A5 3 3 .细节理解题根据第二排第一个图片“Get away from the computer every 30minuts”，可知每30分钟离开电脑休息一下；两个小时需要离开4 次5 3 4 .细节理解题根据第三排第二个图片“Read a book before going to sleep”可知，” 在睡觉之前读书” 是比较健康的5 3 5 .细节理解题根据第三排最后一个图片“ Sleepearlier(byl0pm)”可知在10点之前睡觉时健康的5 3 6 .主旨大意题根据文章图片和提示文字，可知本文讲的是有关健康的规律作息安排A Basketball GameA basketballgame is between Class One and ClassThree on the school playground at 4:30tomorrow afternoon. Come and watch it,please.Date: March 29th,MondayWonderful Stamp ShowDo you likedifferent stamps about animals? Come toenjoy our stamp show in the school gym.From 8:00 am to 4:00 pm this Saturday.Movie NightPlace: School HallSwimming LessonThere is a swimminglesson every Saturday afternoon in the schoolTime: 8:00 pm —10:00 pm, this SundayMovie: Hi, MomThe movie is free.gym. It's from 2:00 pm to 6:00 pm. If youlike swimming, come to join us.537. The basketball game begins on. A. Monday morning B. Mondayafternoon C. Saturday morning D. Sunday afternoon538. We see the movie Hi, Mom.A. on the playground B. in the gym C. in the school hall D. in theclassroom539. Jack can take the swimming l esson.A. every day B. once a week C. twice a week D. three times aweek【 答案】537. B538. C539. B【 分析】本文是关于篮球赛、邮票展览，电影夜和游泳课等四个公告。

537 . 细节理解题o 根据“A basketball game is between Class One and Class Three on theschool playground at 4:30 tomorrow afternoon”及"Monday”可知，篮球赛在周一下午4 :3 0 ,故填 B538 . 细节理解题根据“Place: School Hall”及“Movie: Hi, M a〃 ” 可知，在学校礼堂观看电影，故选C539 . 细节理解题根据“There is a swimming lesson every Saturday afternoon in theschool gyrrT可知，游泳课是一周一次，故选BIt's Jimmy's birthday and he is 9 years old. He gets a lot of presents from his family andone of them is a big drum（ 鼓） . His grandfather buys it for him. Jimmy likes it very much. Heplays with it every day and he often makes a ternble noise（ 可怕的声音） . His father works inthe day and Jimmy is in bed when he gets home in the evening. So his father doesn't hear thenoise. But Mrs. Black doesn't like the noise, so one morning she takes a sharp knife and goesto Jimmy's room when he hits his drum. She says to him, "Hello! Jimmy”. Do you knowthere is something very nice in your drum? Here is a knife. Please open the drum and let'sfind it.”540. What does Jimmy get on his birthday?A. He gets only one present from his family.C. He gets a knife and a drum.541. Who gives Jimmy a drum?A. His mother buys it for him.C. His father's friend buys it for him.B. He gets a lot of presents.D. He gets a drum from Mrs. BlackB. His father buys it for him.D. His grandfather buys it for him.542. What's the Chinese meaning of “hits” in this passage?A . 敲击 B . 拿着 C . 知道 D . 看见543. Mrs. Black gives Jimmy a knife b e c a u s e .A. she likes Jimmy's drum B. she knows there is something in thedrumC. she doesn't like the noise D. she wants to know what is in the drum【 答案】540. B541. D542. A543. C【 分析】本文是一篇记叙文，主要讲述Jimmy生日收到一个特别的礼物——鼓，然后常常白天敲打，制造出可怕的声音，这个声音让Mrs Black很难受，最终她给了 Jimmy一把刀，想让他割破鼓的故事。

540 . 细节理解题根据"He gets a lot of presents from his family.”可知，在生日上 Jimmy获得了很多的礼物541 . 细节理解题根据“His grandfather buys it for him.”可知，他的爷爷给他买了一个鼓542 .词义猜测题根据“so one morning she takes a sharp knife and goes to Jimmy's roomwhen he hits his drum.”可 知 , 此 处 hits his drum是指" 敲鼓"，所以hit的意思为: 敲击543 . 细节理解题根据“Mrs. Black doesn't Hke the noise, so one morning she takes asharp knife”可知，Mrs Black不喜欢这个鼓声，所以给Jimmy 一把刀Mr. and Mrs. Woods come from Washington. They love Beijing very much. They teachEnglish in a middle school there. They have two children, Sandy and Paul. They are inBeijing now.Mr. Woods likes swimming and singing. His wife likes swimming and reading. Theyoften go swimming in the afternoon. Sandy likes playing football and swimming. Paul likesswimming and playing basketball with his Chinese friend.Paul's uncle, John works in a hospital in New York. He likes swimming too. He lovesBeijing and likes to work in Beijing. But he can't speak Chinese at all. Now he is still thereand goes to Chinese classes every week.Today at Beijing airport, John meets Sandy. Sandy is very happy to see her cousin,Linda. They are going back to the USA. They'H have a vacation there for about three weeks.But Linda can't find her nice watch which she likes very much. At last, Sandy helps her findit in her wallet. Ifs a purple one.544. How many people are there in Sandy's family?A. Three.B. Four.C. Five.D. seven.545. What does Mr. Woods like?A. Reading.B. Playing football. C. Skating.D. Swimming.546. Paul's uncle is working in______ now.A. AmericaB. ChinaC. EnglandD. Japan547. Why does PauPs uncle go to Chinese classes every week?A. Because he wants to know more about China.B. Because he wants to make friends with Chinese.C. Because he loves Beijing and likes to work in Beijing and wants to speak Chinese well.D. Because he would like to help Chinese in hospital.【 答案】544. B545. D546. A547. C【 分析】这篇短文介绍了 Woods先生一家，他们一家人现在在中国。

5 4 4 .细节理解题根据“Mr. and Mrs. Woods come from Washington...They have twochildren, Sandy and Paul.“可知，Sandy 一家有四 口人故选 B545 . 细节理解题根据“Mr. Woods likes swimming and singing.“可知，Mr. Woods 喜欢游泳和唱歌，故选D546 . 细节理解题 o 根据“Paul's uncle, John works in a hospital in New York.”可知，Paul的叔叔John在纽约的一家医院工作547 . 细节理解题根据"He likes swimming too. He loves Beijing and likes to work inBeijing. But he can't speak Chinese at all. Now he is still there and goes to Chinese classesevery week.”可知，Paul的叔叔每周去上汉语课是因为他喜欢北京，喜欢在北京工作，想说一口流利的汉语。

故选CSue has a cat. She likes playing with it at home. But she's seven now and her parents askher to go to school. She has to leave it at home and walk to school by herself, so she isn'thappy. She doesn't listen to her teacher carefully. So she can't answer the questions.Now the students are having math class. She is looking out of the window. Mr. Greenasks, “What is two plus(力 □ ) two, Sue?^ ^ Sue stands up and she can't answer it.“If your mother gives you two pencils.^^ Mr. Green says."And I give you two, how manypencils do you have?^^“Five, Mr. Green.”“You are w r o n g ,M r. Green says. "You have four.”“I don't think so," the girl says. "I already have one in my pencil box!”根据材料内容选择最佳答案。

548 . What animal does Sue often play with?A. A dog. B. A cat.549. Why is Sue not happy?A. Because she has to leave her cat at home.C. Because she doesn't like school.550. How does Sue go to school?A. By car. B. By bus.551. Who is Mr. Green?A. Sue?s teacher. B. Sue's uncle.552. There are/isC. A chicken. D. A lion.B. Because she likes playing.D. Because she can't answer the questions.C. By bike. D. On foot.C. Sue's brother. D. Sue^ father.pencil(s) in Sue's pencil box.A. 0B. 1C. 2D. 3【 答案】548. B549. A550. D551. A552. B【 分析】本文讲述了 Sue有一只猫，但是上学的时候不能跟猫玩，所以很不开心，以及在数学课上发生的趣事。

548 . 细节理解题根据“Sue has a cat. She likes playing with it at home."可知 Sue 经常跟猫玩，故选B549 . 细节理解题根 据 "She has to leave it at home and walk to school by herself, so sheisn,t happy”可知，她不高兴是因为把猫留在家里550 . 细节理解题根据“She has to leave it at home and walk to school by herself'可知Sue是步行上学的551 . 细节理国军题根据"Now the students are having math class. She is looking out of thewindow. Mr. Green asks”可知正在上数学课，所以Mr. Green是她的数学老师故选Ao552 . 细节理解题根据"I already have one in my pencil box"I already have one in mypencil b o x .可知Sue的铅笔盒里已经有一支铅笔，故选B。

Here are some activities（ 活动） for the students in No.5 Middle School to join in. Let'shave a look.The School Music FestivalCan you dance well? Do you like singing? Can you play any musical instruments（ 乐器） ？Come to our music festival to have a nice evening on our school playground（ 操场） from 4: 00p.m. to 8: 00 p.m. this Friday.The Movie NightPlace: in the school hall Movie: DETECTIVE CHINATOWN【"Time: from 5: 00 p.m. to6: 50 p.m. on Thursday Movie: Hi! Mom Time: from 6: 00 p.m. to 8: 20 p.m. on SundayThe Photo ShowDo you like taking photos? We have many kinds of beautiful photos on show in theschool hall this weekend. The show is from 9: 00 a.m. to 5: 00 p.m.The Volleyball GameTeam（ 队伍） ： No.5 Middle School vs Guangming Middle School Place: in the sports hallof No.5 Middle School Time: at 10: 00 a.m. on Tuesday根据材料内容选择最佳答案， 并将其标号填入题前。

553. Students can go to the music festival on.A. Tuesday. B. Friday. C. Saturday. D. Sunday.554. How many movies can you watch a week?.A. One. B. Two. C. Three. D. Four.555. Who may（ 可能） warn to go to the photo s how?.A. A 13 - year - old boy who likes playing the guitar.B. A 10 - year - old girl who likes playing volleyball.C. A 14 - year - old student who likes taking pictures.D. An English teacher who likes watching movies.556. The volleyball game is.A. in the sports hall of No.5 Middle SchoolB. on the playground of No.5 Middle SchoolC. on the playground of Guangming Middle SchoolD. in the sports hall of Guangming Middle School557. Which statement is TRUE according to the ma t e r i a l ? .A. The music festival lasts （ 持续） for three hours in the school hall.B. You can see DETECTIVE CHINATOWN III on Sunday evening.C. The photo show finishes at 5: 00 p.m. this Friday.D. The volleyball game is at 10: 00 a.m. on Tuesday.【 答案】553. B554. B555. C556. A557. D【 导语】本文是一篇应用文。

文章介绍了第五中学的一些学生活动信息5 5 3 .细节理解题根据“Come to our music festival to have a nice evening on our schoolplayground （ 操场） from 4: 00 p.m. to 8: 00 p.m. this Friday.“可知音乐节是在周五故选B o554.细节理解题根据“ 乂006 ： £"；7 7丫 £ ： ” / 乂470卬 ? “〃” 以及“ ^1 0 5 © :〃〃用 加 '可知一周可以看两部电影555. 推理判断题 o 根据“Do you like taking photos? We have many kinds of beautifulphotos on show in the school hall this weekend.”可知，C 项喜欢拍照的人会去摄影展故选C o5 5 6 . 细节理解题根据最后一段"The Volleyball Game Place: in the sports hall of No.5Middle School”可知排球比赛在五中体育馆故选A o557. 细节理解题。

根据最后一段“The Volleyball Game Time: at 10: 00 a.m.on Tuesday^^可知D 项符合文意On Friday morning, November 17, Moonlight School will have a Reading Festival.Grade 7, 8 and 9 students will all participate （ 参与）in it.TimeGrade 7Grade 8Grade 98:00 a.m.-9:00 a.m.Book SharingTalking with aWriterSpeed Reading9:15 a.m.-10:15 a.m.Talking with aWriterSpeed ReadingRadio Book Blast10:30 a.m.-ll:30 a.m.Speed ReadingBook SharingTalking with a Writer11:30 p.m.SPECIAL LUNCH FOR ALLThe special lunch will be in the cafeteria.Every student should take more than 3 books to share with others.Book Sharing will be in the playground. The other activities will be in students' ownclassrooms.558. When can Grade 7 students talk with their favourite writer, Mr. Williams?A. At 8:30.B. At 9:30. C. At 10:30. D. At 11:30.559. Which activity will Grade 8 students do at 11:00 a. m.?A. Book Sharing. B. Speed Reading. C. Radio Book Blast. D. Talking with aWriter.560. Who will do the Radio Book Blast activity?A. Grade 7 students. B. Grade 8 students. C. Grade 9 students. D. All thestudents.561. Which of the following is true?A. All the students can have lunch in the cafeteria.B. All the activities will be in their own classrooms.C. Every student can take two books to share with others.D. All the students from three grades have the same activities.【 答案】558. B559. A560. C561. A【 分析】本文是一则通告。

月光学校将为初中7-9年级学生举行读书节，通告详细列出了不同年级学生参与各环节活动的具体时间和地点，以及参与活动需要注意的事项5 5 8 .细节理解题根据表格第三行前两列信息“9:15a.m.-10:15a.m.TalkingwithaWrite户可知七年级学生可以在上午9:15 a.m.-10:15 a.m.和一名作家交谈，故选B5 5 9 .细节理解题根据表格第四行第一和第三列信息“10:30 a.m』 : 30 a.m. BookSharing”可知八年级学生在上午10:30 30 a.m. 进行图书分享，故选A560 . 细节理解题根据表格第三行最后一列信息“Radio Book Blast”可知这是九年级学生独有的活动，其他年级没有，故选C561 . 推理判断题根据文中“The special lunch will be in the cafeteria.”可知特别的午餐将会在自助餐厅进行，这是针对三个年级的所有学生，A 项正确，故选AMrs. Smith is Jim's mother. She loves her family very much. She goes to the store everyday. She often buys clothes for Jim and her husband（ 丈夫） . Now many clothes are on sale atRenmin Clothes Store. They are very cheap.Mrs. Smith comes to the store and she wants to buy some clothes for her family. Therethey have sweaters in all colors for ¥ 15 each and sports shoes for only ¥28. Mrs. Smithlikes the red sweater and she buys one for herself. She buys a pair of sports shoes for her son.The T-shirts in the store are just Y 18! She buys a white one for Mr. Smith. And that's not all.The socks in all colors are Y2 each. She buys the socks in many colors for her family.She is really a good mother and a good wife （ 妻子） .562. Mrs. Smith often buvs for her family.A. clothes B. fruitsC. books563. The clothes at Renmin Clothes Store are_______.A. very great B. very cheapC. very long564. Mrs. Smith likes the_______ .A. red sweater B. blue T-shirtC. green sweater565. She buys_______ for Mr. Smith.A. a pair of shoes B. a pair of shortsC. a T-shirt566. ——Does Mrs. Smith only buy a pair of socks?A. Yes, she does B. No, she doesn'tC. Yes, she is【 答案】562. A563. B564. A565. C566. B【 导语】本文叙述了史密斯太太经常给家人买食物、水果和衣服。

服装店里的衣服在甩卖，物美价廉，史密斯太太给家人和自己都买了一些衣物562 . 细节理解题根据第一段中“She often buys clothes for Jim and her husband”可知史密斯太太经常为家人买衣服563 . 细节理解题根据第一段中“Now many clothes are on sale at Renmin Clothes Store.They are very cheap”可知服装店有很多衣服在打折，非常便宜564 . 细节理解题根据第二段中“Mrs. Smith likes the red sweater and she buys one fbrhersef可知史密斯太太喜欢这件红色毛衣565 . 细节理解题根据第二段中"The T-shirts in the store are just ¥ 18! She buys a whiteone for Mr. Smith”可知史密斯太太给丈夫买了一件T 恤衫566 . 细节理解题根据第二段中“She buys the socks in many colors for her family”可知史密斯太太给家人买了很多袜子，不止一双。

故选BEmma: Excuse me. Do you have a hat, Paul?Paul: Yes, I do.Emma: Where is it?Paul: It's on the wall. Do you have a soccer ball?Emma: Yes, I do. It's under the desk. Does your brother Bill have a basketball?Paul: Yes, he does.Emma: Where is it?Paul: It's under his bed. Does your sister have a computer?Emma: No, she doesn't.567. Where is Emma's soccer ball?A. On the wall.B. Under the desk.C. Under the bed.D. I don't know.568. Does Bill have a basketball?A. Yes, he does. B. No, he doesn't.basketballs.569. What does Emma's sister have?A. A hat. B. A basketball.C. He has a basketball. D. He has threeC. A computer.D. I don't know.【 答案】567. B568. A569. D【 分析】本文是一篇艾玛和保罗的对话。

567 . 细节理解题根据对话“It's under the desk.”可知足球在桌子下，故选B568 . 细节理国军题根据对话“Does your brother Bill have a basketball?...Yes, he does."可知比尔有篮球，故选A569 . 细节理解题通读对话内容可知我们并不能知道艾玛的姐姐有什么，故选DHi, I'm Alice. This is my grandmother, Jenny. She is kind （ 和蔼的）. She is 70. Shehas two sons and a daughter. My father is her first son. His name is Mike. He is 42. Mymother's name is Sally. David is my uncle. He has a son. His name is Frank. He is my cousin.Linda is my aunt. She has a daughter and a son. They are Gina and Tom. I like Gina. She ismy good friend.570 . M汰 e is Alice's .A. son B. grandfather C. father D. cousin571. Alice's mother isA. LindaB. JennyC. GinaD. Sally572. Alice has _____ _ cousin（ s） .A. oneB. twoC. threeD. four573. Linda isA. Alice's sisterB. Sally's daughterC. Frank's motherD. Tom's mother574. Which is TRUE （ 正确的）？A. Alice's grandparents are 70.B. David is Frank's father.C. Alice has a brother and a sister.D. Gina and Tom are good friends.【 答案】570. C571. D572. C573. D574. B【 分析】本文是一篇记叙文。

文章主要介绍了 Alice的一家570 . 细节理解题根据'Tm Alice”以及"My father is her first son. His name is Mike."可知 Mike是 Alice的父亲571 . 细节理解题根据“My mother's name is Sally”可知Alice的妈妈是Sally故选Do572 . 细节理解题根据“His name is Frank. He is my cousin. Linda is my aunt. She has adaughter and a son”可知Alice有一个堂弟，有一个表妹和一个表弟573 . 细节理解题根据“Linda is my aunt. She has a daughter and a son. They are Gina andTom”可知Linda是 Tom的妈妈574 . 细节理解题根据“David is my uncle. He has a son. His name is Frank”可知 David是 Frank的父亲Do you know anything about the Suspended Building of Tujia Nationality（ 土家族吊脚楼） . There are many houses of this kind in Hubei. Usually they have two floors. On the firstfloor, there are no rooms for people because it is for pigs, cows, chickens, ducks, sheep, dogsand so on. Tujia people always put the firewood（ 木柴） on the first floor, too. And they use itto cook. People live on the second floor. The living room is in the center of the house. It isvery big. It is for dinner and meeting friends. There are some bedrooms next to the livingroom. The kitchen and the bathroom are usually at the back of the house.But now, many young people don't want to live there. Some of the Suspended Buildingsare very old. The government（ 政府） are trying to keep them well, because they are thecolorful culture （ 文化） of Tujia Nationality.根据材料内容选择最佳答案。

575. Tujia people usually keep their a n i ma l s .A. on the first floor B. on the second floorC. at the back of their houses D. on the left of their houses576. Tujia people have dinner in the.A. kitchen B. bedroom C. living room D. dining room577. There are floors in the Suspended Building.A. two B. three C. four D. many578. We can infer（ 断） from the passage that.A. Tujia people live on the first floorB. Tujia people use firewood to cookC. Tujia people live there because they are poor（ 贫穷的）D. many young people like to live in the Suspended Buildings now579. What's the best title of the passage?A. The house in HubeiB. The Life of Tujia PeopleC. The Culture of Tujia NationalityD. The Suspended Building of Tujia Nationality【 答案】575. A576. C577. A578. B579. D【 导语】本文主要介绍了土家族吊脚楼，但是现在很多人不想住在那里，所以政府现在正在保护它们，因为它们是土家族的文化。

575 . 细节理解题根据“On the first floor, there are no rooms for people because it is forpigs, cows, chickens, ducks, sheep”可知，动物住在一楼故选 A576 . 细节理解题根据"The living room is in the center of the house. It is very big. It isfor dinner and meeting fHends”可知，他们在客厅里吃饭故选Co577 . 细节理解题根据“Usually they have two floors”可知，吊脚楼有两层578 . 细节理解题根据“Tujia people always put the firewood（ 木柴） on the first floor, too.And they use it to cook”可知，土家族人用木柴做饭579 . 最佳标题题本文主要介绍了土家族吊脚楼，故以选项D“ 土家族吊脚楼” 为标题更合适故选DoMy name is Amy. I usually get up at seven every morning. I usually have an egg, somebread and a glass of milk for breakfast. Then my father drives me to school. I have a veryhappy family.John is my father. He's a cook. He gets up at half past six every day. Then he runs in thepark. At ten past seven, he has breakfast.Mary is my mother. She works in a hospital. She saves many people's lives. She gets upat the same time as my father. She cooks breakfast for us. She goes to work at a quarter toeight.Tom is my brother. He drives a bus every day. He needs to get up at five o'clock in themorning. He has to go to work at half past five. He usually takes two hamburgers with him towork. They're his favorite food.根据材料内容选择最佳答案。

580 . What does Amy's father do?B. Tom is a driver and works in a hospital.A. A teacher. B. A cook.C. A doctor.D. A driver.581. What time does Mary get up?A. At five o'clock. B. At six thirty.C. At seven o'clock.D. At seven ten.582. What does Tom have for breakfast?A. Hamburgers. B. Eggs.C. Bread.D. Milk.583. Who gets up /ofest（ 最迟地） ？A. John. B. Tom.C. Mary.D. Amy.584. Which of the following is TRUE?A. Amy's mother goes to the park every day.C. Amy goes to school in her father^ car.D. Amy's father cooks for the family every morning.【 答案】580. B581. B582. A583. D584. C【 导语】本文主要介绍了艾米一家人的职业，起床时间等信息。

580 . 细节理解题根据“ John is m y的her. He， s a cook”可知艾米的爸爸是厨师，故选Bo581 . 细节理解题根据“John is my father. He?s a cook. He gets up at half past six everyday. ”以及“She gets up at the same time as my father”可知玛丽和约翰的起床时间一样，都是六点半，故选B582 . 细节理解题根据“He usually takes two hamburgers with him to work.”可知汤姆早上吃汉堡包，故选A583 . 细节理解题根据文章内容可知艾米每天早上七点起床，约翰和玛丽是六点半起床，汤姆五点起床，所以艾米是最迟的，故选D584 . 细节理解题根据“Then my father drives me to school”可知艾米坐她爸爸的车去上学，故选CWho is your favorite person? Maybe it is a family member （ 成员） , a friend, a teacher orsomeone else （ 另 !j的人）. I like my elder sister best. She is the most important and helpfulperson in my life. My elder sister is a high school student now. She is 16 years old. She haslong hair, bright （ 明亮的） eyes and a small mouth. She is very clever and she is good atschoolwork. She also teaches me English. She likes playing badminton （ 羽毛球） with me.But I always beat her at badminton. She likes reading and listening to music. But she neverruns.My elder sister is not only （ 不但） a sister,but also （ 而且）a teacher in my heart. I willlove her forever!585 . is my favorite person.A. My friendB. My elder sisterC. My teacher586. My sister has .A. short hair B. bright eyes587. Who is good at playing badminton?A. My sister B. I588. My elder sister doesn't like .A. running B. readingC ・ a big mouthC. My teacherC. listening to music589. Which of the following sentences （ 下 歹ij句子） is wrong （ 错的）？A. She studies in a high school.B. She can't teach me English.C. She is a teacher in my heart.【 答案】585. B586. B587. B588. A589. B【 分析】短文讲述了作者最喜欢的是姐姐，详细介绍了她的外貌和爱好等。

585 . 细节理解题根据“I like my elder sister best.”可知，作者最喜欢是的姐姐故选Bo586 . 细节理解题根据“She has long hair, bright （ 明亮的） eyes and a small mouth."可知，作者的姐姐有一双明亮的眼睛587 . 细节理解题根据"She likes playing badminton （ 羽毛球） with me. But I always beather at badminton.”可知，作者擅长打羽毛球588 . 细节理解题根据“But she never runs.”可知，姐姐不喜欢的是跑步589 . 细节理解题根据“She also teaches me English”可知，作者的姐姐教作者英语，选项B“ 她不能教我英语” 错误My young brother is not clever. He can't answer questions right. My parents are worriedabout him. One day, I take him to a zoo. Then I ask him three questions. The first question is“What do you see in the zoo?”, the second is “Who often gives you money ?,,and the third is“What do you have for your breakfast ?” He can't answer any of them. Then I tell him againand again: the first answer is ''elephants and bears^^; the second answer is “my father and mybrother^^ and the third answer is “bread and milk”. Then he retells（ 复述） the questions andanswers. At last, I ask the three questions again. He can give the right answers: 1 .elephantsand bears;2.my father and my brother 3. bread and milk. I am very happy.When we get home, I tell my parents that my younger brother can answer my questionsright. Then I begin to ask him, “What do you see in the zoo? ”He answers, "Bread andmilk .'"'Who often gives you money?” "Elephants and bears.” "What do you have forbreakfast? "I cry angrily. t4My father and my brother,he answers.根据材料内容，选择最佳答案。

590. My brother can't answer questionsA. wrongB. happilyC. quicklyD.correctly591. Who go to the zoo ?A. My familyB. My brother and I C.My parentsD.My friend and592. How many questions do I ask my brother ?A. ThreeB. FourC.FiveD.Six593. Who tell my brother the answers to the questions?A. My parentsB. IC. My grandparentsD.His friends594. How do I feel at last ?A. AngryB. HungryC. HappyD.Worried【 答案】590. D591. B592. A593. B594. A【 分析】本文主要讲述了作者教自己不太聪明的弟弟正确地回答三个问题，回到家作者很高兴地告诉父母，弟弟终于可以正确回答问题了，待作者再次询问三个问题时，弟弟又回答错了。

590 . 细节理解题根据"My young brother is not clever. He can't answer questions right”可知，弟弟无法正确地回答问题，故选D591 . 细节理解题根据“One day, I take him to a zoo”可知，作者带着弟弟去动物园，故选B o592 . 细节理解题根据“Then I ask him three questions”可知，问了他三个问题，故选A o593 . 细节理解题根据“Then I tell him again and again…”可知，是作者告诉弟弟正确的答案，故选B594 . 细节理解题根据“I cry angrily”可知，弟弟最终回答错了，所以作者感觉很生气，故选ADo you have healthy habits?盘Mary WhiteYeah! I think my habits are very healthy. Every day, I get upearly and go to bed early. Every morning I eat breakfast and eat well.I eat fruit and vegetables every day. And every day I play tennis fortwo hours with my friends.鼠GreenNo, I don't. I get up late so I have no time to eat breakfast. Forlunch, I usually eat lots of hamburgers. I know they are not good forme but I like them. I never play sports. In the evening, after I finishmy homework, I usually play computer games. I go to bed late, atabout a quarter to eleven.丝Helen BrownYes. My habits are very good. I never eat unhealthy （ 不健康的）food. Ice-cream tastes good but I never eat it. Every day I get up atsix o'clock and go to bed at eight thirty. I eat well and play sportsevery day. I run with my father in the morning. So I'm very healthy.A. Because she doesn't like it.595. Mary________ with her friends every day.A. goes to schoolB. doeshomework C. plays tennis D. has lunch596. What does Alan usually have for lunch?A. Hamburgers. B. Vegetables. C. Chicken.597. Alan goes to bed at about________ .D. Fruit.A. 10:15 B. 10:45 C. 11:00598. Why doesn't Helen eat ice-cream?D. 11:45B , Because it's not healthy.C. Because it doesn't taste good.599. Which of the following is true?D. Because her parents don't let her eat it.A. Mary plays computer games for two hours with her friend every day.B. Alan usually eats hamburgers for breakfast.C. Helen gets up early and goes to bed early.D. Mary, Alan and Helen all have healthy eating habits.【 答案】595. C596. A597. B598. B599. C【 导语】本文主要介绍了三个学生的生活习惯。

595 . 细节理用军题根据"And every day I play tennis for two hours with my friends."可知，每天和朋友打两个小时的网球，故选C596 . 细节理解题根据“Forlunch, I usually eat lots of hamburgers”可知，Alan 通常午餐吃汉堡包，故选A597 . 细节理解题根据"I go to bed late, at about a quarter to eleven”可 知 , Alan 大约十点四十五分去睡觉，故选B598 . 细节理解题根据“I never eat unhealthy （ 不健康的） food. Ice-cream tastes good butI never eat it”可知，因为冰淇淋是不健康的，故选B599 . 细节理解题根据"Every day I get up at six o'clock and go to bed at eight thirty”可知，Helen早睡早起，C 表述正确，故选CMascots（ 吉祥物） for the Olympic Games(the firstOlympicmascot)20th23rd26th27th29th30th197219841996200020082012Munich（ 慕尼黑）Los AngelesAtlantaSydneyBeijingLondonGermany （ 德国）AmericaAmericaAustraliaChinathe UK阅读表格内容，选择最佳答案。

600. From the form（ 表格） ， we know the Olympic Games is held every years.A. 2B. 3 C. 4601. The mascot for the Olympic Games was the first Olympic mascot in Olympichistory.A. 20th B. 26th C. 30th602. From the form, we know the Olympic Games had the most mascots.A. 1984 Los AngelesB. 2000 SydneyC. 2008 Beijing603. held both the 23rd and the 26th Olympic Games.A. GermanyB. AmericaC. Australia604. Which of the following is NOT true?A. Atlanta held the Olympic Games in 1996.B. Sydney is one of the cities in Australia.C. London Olympic Games had three mascots.【 答案】600. C601. A602. C603. B604. C【 分析】试题分析：本表格介绍的是各届奥运会的吉祥物，举行地点和时间及其在哪个国家举行的。

6 0 0 .细节理解题根据文中语句理解可知27届奥运会在2000年举行，而 29届在2008年举行，故奥运会每四年举行一次，故选C6 0 1 .细节理解题根据文中第一个文本框的内容理解可知第20届奥运会在德国的慕尼黑举行，故选A602 . 细节理解题根据文中表格内容理解可知北京奥运会的吉祥物有5 个，而悉尼奥运会是3 个，它比北京的奥运会少2 个，故选C603 . 细节理解题根据文中内容理解可知第23届奥运会在Los Angeles, 26届奥运会在 Atlanta都在美国，故选B604 . 细节理解题根据文中第四个文本框的内容可知，伦敦奥运会就有一个吉祥物，故选C考点：考查历史文化类阅读From Monday to Friday, American students usually get up at seven. After breakfast theygo to school on foot or on school bus. Some students ride bikes. They get to school at about8:30. Then they put their schoolbags in their lockers and take only one book, a notebook anda pencil to each class.At noon students have lunch at school. Students don't have a nap after lunch. They goback to have classes until three o'clock. Then they go home.Students usually play or watch TV before supper. They have supper at six in the evening.After supper they usually do their homework. Sometimes they play or talk with their parents.On Saturdays, they often go shopping or go to a park. And on Sundays, they often go tochurch with their parents in the morning and have a big dinner at one o'clock in the afternoon.605 . American students get to school at about .A. 7:30 B. 8:00 C. 8:30 D. 9:00606. American students have lunch from Monday to Friday.A. at homeB. at schoolC. in a restaurantD. in a shop607. What do they usually do after supper?A. They watch TV.B. They go to the church.C. They go shopping.D. They do their homework.608. What does the underlined word "nap" mean?A. 一种牌戏 B . 孤注一掷C . 小睡 D . 绒毛609. What is the passage about?A. American schools.B. American students.C. American parents.D. American teachers.【 答案】605. C606. B607. D608. C609. B【 分析】文章介绍了美国学生的日常生活。

星期一到星期五他们通常7 点起床，早饭后去上学中午他们在学校吃午饭，然后上课，下午3 点放学，然后回家他们在晚饭前玩或看电视，晚饭后做作业或和父母聊天；他们在星期六去购物或去公园，星期天上午和父母去教堂，在下午1 点吃顿大餐605 . 细节理解题根据“They get to school at about 8:30.”可知他们通常8 点半到达学校；故选C606 . 细节理解题根据“ At noon students have lunch at school.”可知周一到周五通常在学校吃午饭；故选B607 . 细节理解题根据“After supper they usually do their homework.”晚饭后通常做家庭作业；故选D608 . 词义猜测题根据"Students don't have a nap after lunch. They go back to haveclasses until three o'clock.”和选项，可知是小睡的意思；故选C6 0 9 .主旨大意题根据文章主要介绍了美国学生的日常生活，所以文章主要是关于学生的；A. American schools 美国的学校; B. American students 美国的学生；C.American parents 美国的父母；D. American teachers 美国的老师；故选 B。

Hi! My name is Hunt. Here is a picture of my class. Joan is short and is wearing ayellow dress. She is good at Maths. David is tall and has black hair. He is good at playingbasketball. He is on the school basketball team. Mike is tall. He has small eyes. He is funny.He can play football. Lily has long hair. She can speak Japanese. Helen is a black girl. Shehas short hair. She likes swimming. She is on the swimming team. I like music. Can you findme? I'm the boy with glasses. Becky is new here. She comes from Hong Kong. She has blackhair and black eyes. She speaks English well. And she is very good at computer science.610. The colour of Joan's dress isA. blue B. blackC. redD. yellow611. ________ has long hair.A. Joan B. LilyC. HelenD. Becky612. Which is right?A. David is short.B. Mike has long hair.C. Helen is a white girl.D. Becky is good at computer science.613. Hunt likes________ .A. basketball B. footballC. musicD. computerscience614. Helen is on the________ team.A. music B. footballC. basketballD. swimming【 答案】610. D611. B612. D613. C614. D【 导语】本文主要介绍了 Hunt班级的一张照片，并一一介绍了照片中的人。

6 1 0 .细节理解题根据"Joan is short and is wearing a yellow dress.”可知，Joan 穿着黄色的裙子，故选D611 . 细节理解题根据“Lily has long hair.”可知，Lily有长头发, 故选B612 . 细节理解题根据"Becky is new here. She comes from Hong Kong. She has blackhair and black eyes. She speaks English well. And she is very good at computer science."可知，Becky擅长计算机科学，故选D613 . 细节理解题根据"My name is Hunt...I like music.”可 知 , Hunt喜欢音乐, 故选Co614 . 细节理解题根据“Helen is a black girl. She has short hair. She likes swimming. Sheis on the swimming team.”可知，Helen 在游泳队，故选 DThursday, April 19thWe got to the clean, lovely city of Yangzhou early in the morning. This isour first trip to China. All the different smells attract our attention （ 吸引我们的注意力）to thelocal food. We are going to try something special for dinner tonight. The hotel we are staying isnot expensive but very clean. We plan to stay here for a few days. Visit some places in the city, andthen travel to the Great Wall in the north.Sunday, April 22ndWe visited the famous Slender West Lake which was crowded withvisitors from all over the world, we also bought a lot of toys for our friends outside the gate of thepark. Everything is so colorful, and we have taken hundreds of photos already! Later today we willdo the famous foot massage （ 按摩）and then leave for Beijing. We will take the night train toBeijing and stay in Beijing for two days, and then catch a bus to the Great Wall.Wednesday, April 25thOur trip to the Great Wall was long and boring. We visited a smallvillage beside the mountains. The village people here live a quiet life. They are the kindest peoplewe have ever met. They always smile and say "Hello". Ralph and I can speak only a little Chinese,so smiling is the best way to show our kindness.617. How did the writer feel about the trip to the Great Wall?615. How long did the writer stay in Yangzhou? A. Four daysC. Six days D. Seven days616. What did the writer do in Yangzhou ?B. Five daysa. climb mountainsb. visit places of interestc. do foot massaged. buy toysA. a;b;cB. a;b;d C. a;c;dD. b;c;dA. Interesting B. Difficult618. What is the best title for the passage?A. The Great WallC. My First Visit to YangzhouC. Exciting D. BoringB. My Traveling in ChinaD. Delicious Food and Beautiful Places【 答案】615. A616. D617. D618. B【 分析】本文以日记的形式记录了作者从扬州到北京的旅游行程。

615 . 细节理解题根据第•篇日记中“April 19th We got to the clean, lovely city ofYangzhou early in the morning.”和第二篇日记中“April 22nd We will take the night train toBeijing”可 知 , 作 者 从 19日到2 2 日待在扬州，一共4 天616 . 细节理解题根据第二篇日记中“We visited the famous Slender West Lake'"'we alsobought a lot of toys for our friends outside the gate of the park."和"Later today we will do thefamous foot massage （ 按摩）” 可知，作者在扬州参观名胜、买玩具和做足疗故选Do617 . 细节理解题根据第三篇日记中“Our trip to the Great Wall was long and boring.“可知去长城的旅行是无聊的618 . 主旨大意题根据第一篇日记中“This is our first trip to China.”可知三篇日记主要记录了作者在中国旅行经历。

故选BMovie NightPlace: School HallDay: FridayTime: 8:00 p.m.-10:00 p.m.Movie: Duckweed （《 乘风破浪》）Stars （ 主演） : Deng Chao, ZhaoLiyingSchool Art FestivalDo you want to watch differentkinds of programs （ 节 目） ? Come to the Art Festival inthe school hall. You can come with your parents andfriends. From 9:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. every Saturday.School Library Do youBasketball GameAttention, please! There is ahave old books, newspapers ormagazines （ 杂志） ？ Just bringthem to the library.Office time: 8:30 a.m.-5:00p.m. every weekday.basketball game between our school and No. 3 HighSchool in the gym at 4:30 p.m. tomorrow.Please come and watch it.619. We can on Friday night.A. see a movie B. watch a basketball gameC. give books to the library D. come to the Art Festival620. There is a basketball game between and at 4:30 p.m. tomorrow.A. our school; No. 1 High school B. No. 1 High school; No. 3 High schoolC. our school; No. 3 High school D. our school; No. 3 Middle school621. We can give old books to the l i br a r y.A. at 9:00 a.m. on Sunday B. at 6:00 p.m. on MondayC. at 10:00 a.m. on Friday D. at 11:00 p.m. on Friday【 答案】619. A620. C621. C【 分析】本文是学校活动的四则布告。

619 . 细节理解题根据“Day: Friday”及“Time: 8:00 p.m.-10:00 p.m.”可知，在周五的晚上我们可以看电影，故选A620 . 细节理解题根据“There is a basketball game between our school and No. 3 HighSchool in the gym at 4:30 p.m. tomorrow”可知，在明天下午有一场我们学校和第三高中的篮球比赛，故选C621 . 细节理解题根据“Office time: 8:30 a.m.-5:00 p.m. every weekday.”可知，C 选项“ 周五的早上10点钟” 符合，故选CoThis class, I ask students about fashion. I show each student seven things and ask theiropinions （ 看法）about each thing. Some of their answers are interesting! Here's what thestudents in Class 8 like:Jodie Smith likes the key ring. Her friend Jordan says he can't stand （ 忍受）the scarf.“It's for old people!” he says. William Jones loves the wallet, and his classmate Gina Taylorloves the watch. Her best friend Ann Rice doesn't mind the watch, but she really likes the hairclip! Jerry Green likes the sunglasses.And the coolest thing is the bell（ 腰带） ！ Everyone loves it!622. What does the writer do?A. A writer. B. A teacher.C. A student. D. We don't know.623. How many things did the writer show to the students?A. Seven. B. Eight. C. Nine. D. Six.624. likes the key ring.A. Jodie Smith B. JordanC. William Jones D. Ann Rice625. Gina Taylor loves and Ann Rice really l i kes.A. the wallet; the watch B. the watch; the hair clipC. the hair clip; the sunglasses D. the watch; the sunglasses626. What is the most popular thing to the students?A. The scarf. B. The belt.C. The watch. D. The book.【 答案】622. B623. A624. A625. B626. B【 分析】本文介绍了八班学生喜欢的东西。

622 . 细节理解题根据“This class, I ask students about fashion”, 可知，作者是一位老师，故选B623 . 细节理解题根据“I show each student seven things and ask their opinions （ 看法）about each thing”，可知，作者向学生展示了 7 件东西，故选A624 . 细节理解题根据"Jodie Smith likes the key ring”，可知，Jodie Smith 喜欢钥匙环，故选A6 2 5 .细节理解题根据“Gina Taylor loves the watch”及"Her best friend Ann Rice doesn'tmind the watch, but she really Hkes the hair clip”, 可知，Gina 喜欢手表，Ann 喜欢发夹，故选B6 2 6 .细节理解题根据“And the coolest thing is the belt（ 腰带） ！ Everyone loves it!”，可知，腰带是最受欢迎的，故选B。

小猪佩奇（ Peppa） 一家今天去购物，下面是他们每个人买到的东西Mother（ 妈妈）Father （ 爸爸）PeppaGeorge1aw*管— —Things（ 东西）/ Y 、A jacket111A cupApenA quiltColourredgreenblackblue627. Mother buys （ 买） a ___.A. penD. jacket628. buys a pen.A. Peppa B. George629. George's quilt is ___.A. red B. green630. Father's ___ is green.A. jacket B. quiltB. cupC. quiltC. MotherD. FatherC. blackD. blueC. penD. cup【 答案】627. B628. A629. D630. A【 分析】这是一篇应用文，内容关于佩奇一家购物买到的东西627 . 题意：妈妈买了 o细节理解题A. p en钢笔；B. cu p 杯子；C. quilt被子；D. jacket夹克衫根据原文表格可知，妈妈买了一个红色的杯子。

故应选B628 . 题意：买了一支笔细节理解题A. Peppa佩奇；B. George乔治；C. M other妈妈；D. Father爸爸根据原文表格可知，佩奇买了一只黑色的笔，故应选A629 . 题意：乔治的被子是细节理解题A. re d 红色；B. green绿色；C. black黑色；D. blue蓝色根据原文表格可知，乔治买了一床蓝色的被子，故应选D630 . 题意: 爸爸的 是绿色的细节理解题A. jacket夹克衫；B. quilt被子；C. p en 钢笔；D. cu p 杯子根据原文表格可知，爸爸买了 一件绿色的夹克衫，故应选AHi, Kate! I saw your name and address in Penfriend magazine（ 杂志） , and I would like tobe your penfriend. First, I will tell you some things about myself. My name is Sidney. Vmfourteen years old. Tm of medium height. 1 have short black hair and brown eyes. Myhobbies（ 爱好） are playing computer games and playing chess.I live with my parents. They came to England about 30 years ago. They came from HongKong, but I never went there. Now my parents have a Chinese restaurant in Newcastle. Welive in a small house near our restaurant. I was bom（ 出生） in Newcastle in 2000.1 can speakChinese, but I can't write it very well. Edwin is my brother. He is 23 and works as anarchitect（ 设计师） in London.I'm in Walker School. It is near my house, so I can walk to school. I like my schoolbecause the teachers are friendly. My school has many sports fields（ 运动场地） . I like sportsvery much. I enjoy playing rugby（ 橄榄球） and badminton in winter, and tennis in summer.My favorite subject is physics. I want to be an engineer（ 工程师） .PH send you a photo of myself with my school friends. I am in the middle. I hope youwill write to me soon, and tell me all about you.631 . Sidney wa n t s .A. to tell Kate about her family B. play sports with KateC. to tell Kate about her school life D. to make friends with Kate632 . How many people are there in Sidney's family?A. Three.B. Four.C. Five.D. Six.633. What's Sidney's favorite sport in winter?A. Tennis. B. Computer games. C. Badminton. D. Basketball.634. Which is Sidney in the photo?A. The first one on the right. B. The first on the left.C. The one in the middle. D. The one next to the teacher.635. Which of the following is NOT TRUE?A. Sidney's favorite subject is math. Sidney's school has many sports fields.B. Sidney is of medium height with short black hair and brown eyes.C. Sidney knows Kate's name and address in a magazine.D. Sidney never went to Hong Kong.【 答案】631. D632. B633. C634. C635. A【 导语】本文是一篇自荐信，写给Kate的一封结交笔友的信，在信中介绍了自己的家庭和学校生活的情况。

631 . 细节理解题 o 根据文中“Hi, Kate! I saw your name and address in Penfriendmagazine （ 杂志） ， and I would like to be your penfriend. First, I will tell you some thingsabout myself. My name is Sidney.“可知，Sidney 想要 Kate 交朋友故选 Do632 . 细节理解题根据文中力 live with my parents. They came to England about 30 yearsago. ...I was bom（ 出生） in Newcastle in 2000.1 can speak Chinese, but I can't write it verywell. Edwin is my brother. He is 23 and works as an architect（ 设计师） in London.“可知，Sidney和他父母住在一起，他还有一个哥哥，他们一家有4 口人633 . 细节理解题。

根据文中“I enjoy playing rugby （ 橄榄球） and badminton in winter, andtennis in summer.”可知I, Sidney冬天最喜欢打羽毛球故选Co634 . 细节理解题根据文中力 ' 1 1 send you a photo of myself with my school friends. I amin the middle.”可知，照片中间的那个人是Sidney635 . 推理判断题根据文中“My favorite subject is physics. I want to be an engineer（ 工程师） . ” 可知，Sidney最喜欢的科目是物理，选项A 是错误的ObjectColorWhose（ 谁的）KeyBlackHelen'sRulerWhiteBob'sCupRedAlice'sCDWhiteEric'sJacketGreenBob's根据短文内容，选择正确答案636.The key is________.A. Eric's B. Helen's C. Alice'sD. Bob's637.What color is the cup?A. White. B. Black. C. Red. D. Green.638.and are white.A. The key; the CD B. The ruler; the jacket C. The key; the jacket D. The ruler; theCD639. Bob has.A. a ruler and a jacket B. a cup and a CD C. a ruler and a cup D. a CD and ajacket6 4 0 .表格中第一个单词“Object”的中文意思是“”A . 形状 B . 材质 C . 物品 D . 方位【 答案】636. B637. C638. D639. A640. C【 分析】表格显示了物品及其颜色和主人。

6 3 6 .细节理解题根据第二排第三列“Heleny 可知钥匙是海伦的637 . 细节理解题根据第四排第二列“Red”可知茶杯是红色的638 . 细节理解题根据第三排“Ruler 和第五排“CD”可知尺子和光盘是白色的故选Do639 . 细节理解题根据第三排“Ruler”和最后一排的“Jacket”可知鲍勃有一把尺子和一件夹克640 . 词义猜测题根据第一列“Key”及"Ruler”等词可知"object”指的是“ 物品” 故选CoMary has a good habit. Her big things are all in the notebook. What does she do thesedays?December 20th, Monday• Go to the library with Cindy after school.• Buy Alice a pen fbr her birthday.,Ask Dad to buy the history book.December 21st, Tuesday• Have the art lesson from 4:00 p.m.to 6:00 p.m.• Buy a hat fbr the school trip.▲ , ThursdayHave the English lesson from 5:00 p.m. to 6:00p.m.Call Peter at 8:30 p.m.December 25th, SaturdayTHE SCHOOL TRIPDecember 26th, SundayEmma's birthday party3:00 p.m.- 6:00 p.m.HAVE FUN !!!641. Mary has the art lesson onC. Thursday642. Which is right in ?A. December 22nd.C. December 24th.643. From the notes, we know that MaryA. loves to go on a school tripC. needs to go to Alice's birthday party1.A. Monday B. TuesdayD. SaturdayB. December23rd.D. November 23rd.B. goes to the library with her dadD. has an English lesson for two hours【 答案】641. B642. B643. A【 导语】本文主要讲述了 Mary对这个星期大事件的记录，文中记录了一个星期中的大事件，并记录了 Mary对于某些事情的心情。

641. 细节理解题根据文中“December 21st, Tuesday *Have the art lesson from 4:00p.m.”可知，Mary在周二有艺术课642 . 推理判断题根据“December21st,Tuesday”及“Thursday”可知，此处应该是周二是 21号，周三是22号，那么周四应该是23号，故选B643 . 细节理解题根据"December 26th, Sunday Emma's birthday party”及笑脸，可知，Mary喜欢学校郊游，故选ADo you want to be healthy every day? Here are some things you can do.Get up early. You must go to bed early in the evening. Don't watch TV or play computergames too late. You should go to bed before ten o'clock in the evening and then get up atabout six in the morning.Eat healthy food. It*s important to eat fruit and vegetables every day. Ice cream andhamburgers taste good, but they are really not good for you. So don't eat them every day. Andyou must eat a good breakfast every morning.Play sports every day. You are always busy at school, but you should exercise every dayto be healthy. In the morning, you can run for exercise. After school, you can play ball gameswith your friends. Even （ 甚至）in the evening, you can take a walk or swim. When you'refree, just exercise!Make more friends. It is a useful way to keep healthy because sharing interesting thingswith them makes you feel relaxed. Life will become more beautiful with good friends. Somake many of them!644 . How many things can you do to be healthy according to the writer?646. According to the passage, what can you do to relax yourself?A. Three. B. Four.C. Five.D. Six.645. Whafs good for your health?A. Ball games.B. Ice cream.C. Computer games.D. Hamburgers.A. Playing the computer games.B. Eating a good breakfast.C. Running in the morning.D. Talking about interesting things with good friends.647. Which of the following is TRUE?A. You should go to bed at 11 in the evening.B. You can eat ice cream or hamburgers every day.C. You should exercise every day.D. Friends make you sad.【 答案】644. B645. A646. D647. C【 分析】本文向我们介绍保持健康的方法和建议。

644 . 细节理解题根据“Get up early.", "Eat healthy fbod."，“Play sports every day.”和“Make more iYiends.”可知，本文介绍了四种保持健康的方法，故选B645 . 细节理现军题 o 根据"You are always busy at school, but you should exercise every dayto be healthy.”可知，应该每天锻炼身体以保持健康，故选A646 . 细节理解题根据“It is a useful way to keep healthy because sharing interestingthings with them makes you feel relaxed.”可知，与朋友们分享有趣的事情使你感到放松，故选D647 . 推理判断题根据“Play sports every day.”可知，要每天做运动，故选CWhat is Andy going to do when he has no schooling? Look at what he writes!April 1: Fruit picking timeWhy not wear comfortable（ 舒 月 艮 的 ） clothes and pick fruit with Mum and Dad? UncleLiu's farm is a wonderful place for a day out.April 8: Museum tourGo to the art museum. Learn about the culture and history of our city.April 15: English dayTry to speak English with Mum and Dad for a whole day. I can use pictures or bodylanguage（ 语言） to help myself if they don't understand.April 22: Super partyApril is the best time to hold a party in the garden. Td like my best friends to come tomy home. We can play games for a great time!May l:Take photos（ It's May Day holiday.）Take a trip outside the city with friends and take pictures. Spending time in nature （ 自然） is good, too.May 6: Be a volunteerIt is cool to go to the community centre and work for others.648. The reading above（ 上面的） is about plans for.A. Andy's lessons B. Andy?s school daysC. Andy's school activities D. Andy's weekends or holidays649. On April 15, Andy.A. is going to a farmB. plans to work as a volunteerC. isn't going to speak any EnglishD. plans to practise English with his parents650. Andy is going to learn about the history of his city.A. on April 1B. on April 8C. on April 15 D. on April 22651. Andy isn't going to in April.A. pick fruit B. have a partyC. be a volunteer D. go to the garden652. Which of the following is TRUE?A. Andy plans to take photos in the city.B. Andy wants to invite his cousins to his party.C. Andy is going to the history museum this April.D. Andy likes to visit his uncle's farm to pick fruit.【 答案】648. D649. D650. B651. C652. D【 分析 1本文介绍了 Andy的假期生活。

648 . 细节理解题根据“What is Andy going to do when he has no schooling”可知，本文介绍了 Andy放假的生活，故选D649 . 细节理解题根据“April 15: English day...Try to speak English with Mum and Dadfora whole day”可知，这一天他与父母练习英语，故选D650 . 细节理解题根据"April 8: Museum tour” 与“Go to the art museum. Learn about theculture and history of our city”可知，4 月 8 日这天去博物馆了解城市文化和历史，故选Bo651 . 细节理解题根据“May 6: Be a volunteer”可知，做志愿者是五月份的事情，故选Co652 . 推理判断题根据“Uncle Liu's farm is a wonderful place for a day out”可知，他喜欢去叔叔的农场摘水果，D 表述正确，故选DSunday, May 20thToday is Sunday and the weather is very terrible. Ifs raining all day. There are no peopleplaying in the park. And there is no one walking on the street. It's so quiet. The bad weathermakes me unhappy. Many people are watching TV at home. On the street there are a fewbuses and cars. They are running slowly. The rain will stop on Wednesday. The sun will comeout. And I wish to play with my friends outside on that day.653 . Why are there no people walking on the street on Sunday?A. Because ifs too hot. B. Because ifs raining all day.C. Because they like to stay at home. D. Because there are so many buses andcars on the street.654 . The underlined phrase a few means .A . 许多 B . 很少 C . 没有 D . 太多655 . From the diary, we know.A. It will be sunny on WednesdayB. Some people are playing in the park on SundayC. The buses are running quickly on the street.D. The writer feels happy because of the rain.【 答案】653. B654. B655. A【 导语】本文是一篇日记，主要记叙了五月二十号的天气状况以及人们的活动。

6 5 3 .细节理解题根据文中"It's raining all day. And there is no one walking on thestreet.”可知，星期天街上没有人行走是因为整天都在下雨6 5 4 .词句猜测题根据前文"It's raining all day.和 Many people are watching TV athome「由整天都在下雨和许多人在家看电视，可猜测出，划线部分所在的句意应是：街上有几辆公共汽车和小汽车，故下划线短语的意思应是“ 几辆、很少工故选B6 5 5 .推理判断题根据文中“The rain will stop on Wednesday. The sun will come out."可推断出，星期三将是晴天Bath, 97 miles west of London, is the largest city in Somerset England. It became aWorld Heritage Site in 1987.The city got its name from the Roman Baths, which was a place for public bathing inRoman Britain. The water there is naturally heated under the ground. Today travellers are nolonger allowed to enter the water. However, the exhibitions there will tell you the history ofthe Roman Baths. You can see many old Roman objects, including the coins that were throwninto the water to show respect to the goddess.Looking over the city, you will see many old buildings in the color of honey. Amongthem, the Royal Crescent and the Circus are the most famous. The Royal Crescent is a row of30 houses in the shape of crescent. The Circus is about 200 meters to the east of the RoyalCrescent. It is a huge circle formed with large townhouses. It has three parts of the samelength by three entrances with a lawn in the center. When visiting Bath, you can't miss thesetwo sites.The museums in the city are also popular. You can go and enjoy western paintings. Ifyou are interested in the English writer Jane Austen, you can go to Jane Austen Center toknow more about her life with her father in Bath. If you come in October, you can even takepart in the bath film Festival.656. The passage is mainly about the in Bath.A. writers B. paintings C. festivals D. buildings657. According to the passage, what can travellers do in the Roman Baths?A. Take a bath. B. Play in the water. C. Enjoy old coins. D. Buy oldRoman objects.658. Which of the following is correct about the Royal Crescent and the Circus?A. where Jane Austen once livedB. that got its name from the heated waterC. where a film festival is held all year round D. that has been a World Heritage Site for21 years660. From this passage we know thatA. Bath must be the largest city in England. B. People like to visit the museums inBath.C. People threw coins into the water just for fun.D. Many old buildings in Bath is made ofhoney.【 答案】656. D657. C658. B659. A660. B【 导语】本文是一篇说明文。

主要介绍了一个世界文化遗产地——巴思6 5 6 .推理判断题根据“Looking over the city, you will see many old buildings in the colorof honey.”和全文内容可知，讲述了巴思的建筑物，故选D6 5 7 .细节理解题根据"You can see many old Roman objects, including the coins thatwere thrown into the water to show respect to the goddess.“可知，你可以看到为了 表示对女神的尊敬而扔进水里的硬币，故选C6 5 8 .细节理解题根据“The Royal Crescent is a row of 30 houses in the shape of crescent.The Circus is about 200 meters to the east of the Royal Crescent. It is a huge circle formedwith large townhouses. It has three parts of the same length by three entrances with a lawn inthe center.”可知，the Circus 是圆形的，在 Royal Crescent 的东边，而且 the Circus 有 3个入口。

故选B659 . 细节理解题根据“ If you are interested in the English writer Jane Austen, you can goto Jane Austen Center to know more about her life with her father in Bath.”可 矢 口 , JaneAusten曾经生活在巴思这个地方，故选A660 . 推理判断题根据"The museums in the city are also popular. You can go and enjoywestern paintings.”可知，巴思的博物馆也很流行，因此人们也有可能会去参观博物馆，故选BDuring the day we work and play; at night we sleep. Our bodies rest while we sleep. In themorning we are ready to work and play again. While we are asleep, our bodies grow most.Children who are tired usually need more sleep. We can get our lessons better and we feelbetter too when we have a good rest. Boys and girls who are eight or nine years old need tenhours of sleep every night. Our bodies need plenty of air when we sleep. If we do not getenough fresh air we'll feel tired when we wake up. While in bed we must not cover ourheads. If we do, our lungs （ 肺 ）will not get enough fresh air. If we open our windows atnight we can have plenty of fresh air. Cool air is better than warm air. Boys and girls whowant to grow and be strong must get plenty of sleep.661 . Our bodies grow most while we are .665. What do the lungs need most?A.sleepingB. playingC. eatingD. waking662. Which is die best air for us?A.Hot airB. Cool airC. Warm airD. Dry air663. Too little sleep makes us .A.happyB. hungryC. tiredD. grow664• How much sleep should boys and girls of nine years have every night?A.Eight hoursB. Nine hoursC. Ten hoursD. Eleven hoursA. Exercise B. Food C. Rest D. Fresh air【 答案】661. A662. B663. C664. C665. D【 分析 1文章讲述了学生们需要充足的睡眠，同时在睡眠中我们也需要足够的新鲜空气，课后的体育运动也是保持健康非常好的方法。

661 . 细节理解题根据文中While we are asleep, our bodies grow most.可知当我们睡着了, 我们的身体在成长所以选A662 . 细节理解题根据文中Cool air is better than warm air.可知清凉的空气比温暖的空气好所以选B663 . 细节理解题根据文中 If we do not get enough fresh air weUl feel tired when wewake up.可知如果我们没有得到足够的新鲜空气当我们醒来就感觉累所以选Co6 6 4 .细节理解题根据文中 Boys and girls who are eight or nine years old need ten hoursof sleep every night.可知八九岁的男孩和女孩每天晚上需要十个小时的睡眠所以选Co665 . 细节理解题根据文中 If we do, ourlungs （ 肺 ）will not get enough fresh air.可知我们的肺最需要新鲜空气所以选DHi, Mona,Thanks for your e-mail of April 17th. These days I'm in Beijing, China and having agood time here. Are you happy at home in the US, too?Today is the Dragon Boat Festival in China. Do you know this important Chinesefestival? It's a festival to remember a great Chinese poet named Qu Yuan.Now it's 8:30 a.m., and Fm in a big park with my Chinese friend Meimei. There aremany interesting things in the park.I can see many boats on the lake. On every boat, there are some men wearing the sameclothes. What are they doing? They are having the boat races. The boats are running very fastand many people are cheering for them around the lake. How exciting!However, not all the people in the park are watching the boat races. A young father istaking a photo of his beautiful daughter. A young woman is taking a walk with her mother.Under a big tree, some girls are playing games. All of them are having fun!What am I doing now? Can you guess? When I'm writing this e-mail to you, I'm eatingzongzi with Meimei. What's zongzi? It's a kind of traditional Chinese food for the DragonBoat Festival. It's really delicious!What are you doing now, Mona? Please e-mail and tell me.Yours,Judy666. Where is Judy now?A. In the US. B. On a bus. C. In a park. D. Under a tree.667. What does the underlined word “cheering“ mean in Chinese?A . 等待 B . 寻找 C . 凝视 D . 喝彩668. Which thing isn't Judy doing now?A. Watching the boat races. B. Eating zongzi.C. Taking photos. D. Writing an e-mail.669. Which of the following things is NOT mentioned （ 提及） in the e-mail?A. Having the boat races. B. Making zongzi.C. Playing games. D. Taking photos.670. From the e-mail, we can infer （ 推断） that.A. Judy loves the Dragon Boat Festival very muchB. Mona knows a lot about the Dragon Boat FestivalC. Judy wishes Mona to watch the boat races with herD. Judy wants to do something fun on the Dragon Boat Festival【 答案】666. C667. D668. C669. B670. A【 导语】本文是一篇应用文，是朱迪向莫娜介绍中国端午节的电子邮件。

6 6 6 .细节理解题根据“Now it's 8:30 a.m. and I'm in a big park with my Chinese friendMeimei.”可知，朱迪现在在公园里667. 词句猜测题根据“The boats are running very fast and many people are cheering forthem around the lake.”和常识可知，船跑得很快，许多人在湖周围为他们欢呼由此可知，“cheering”表示“ 欢呼，喝彩” ，故选D6 6 8 . 细节理解题根据力 can see many boats on the lake.”和“ When I'm writing this e-mail to you, I'm eating zongzi with Meimei.”可知，朱迪没有在拍照故选 C6 6 9 . 细节理现军题根据"What are they doing? They are having the boat races. ... A youngfather is taking a photo of his beautiful daughter. A young woman is taking a walk with hermother. Under a big tree, some girls are playing games.“可知，只有" 包粽子” 没有在电子邮件中提及。

故选B6 7 0 . 推理判断题根据"AH of them are having ftm"及"What， s zongzi? It， s a kind oftraditional （ 传统的） Chinese food for the Dragon Boat Festival. It's really delicious!”可推理出，朱迪非常喜欢端午节Venice is a great city in Italy. It5s in the northeast part of Italy. This city is very special.In the streets, you can't see cars or buses. Ifs called “City of Water”. It's good to take a tripthere. To get there, you can take a plane from London or take a train from Rome. Don't taketoo many things with you because there are no taxis（ 出租车） . So there are no traffic lights（ 交通信号灯） in the city.Do you like to walk? It is the best way to visit Venice. Or you can take some kinds ofboats on water. There's a kind of boat called “Vaporetto”. It's children's favorite.Piazza San Marco is a good place to have fun. One of the fun things for children is toplay with pigeons（ 鹑子） . They can have great fun being with this kind of white birds. Parentscan buy their children some ice-cream. The ice-cream there tastes great.Guggenheim Museum is also a good place. It's not far from Piazza San Marco. It onlytakes 20 minutes to walk there from Piazza San Marco.671. How can you get to Venice from Rome according to the passage?A. By plane. B. By taxi. C. By train. D. By car.672. Why shouldn't we take too many things to Venice?A. Because there are no taxis in Venice. B. Because there are no traffic lights inVenice.C. Because Venice is a small city. D. Because there are no trains in Venice.673. What can children do on Piazza San Marco according to the passage?①Eat ice-cream.②Take a boat. ③ Watch pigeons.④ Ride a bike.A . ②④ B . ②③ C. ①④ D . ①③67 4. What would be the best title for the passage?A. A country with a long history. B . A good place to take a trip.C. How to go to Venice? D. What can we do on vacation?【 答案】67 1. C67 2. A67 3. D67 4. B【 导语】本文主要介绍了威尼斯这个可以去旅游的好地方。

67 1 .细节理解题根据“or take a train from Rome.”可知从罗马到威尼斯坐火车，故选Co67 2 .细节理解题根据"Don't take too many things with you because there are no taxis（ 出租车） . ” 可知是因为威尼斯没有出租车67 3 .细节理解题根据"One of the fun things for children is to play with pigeons（ 鹑~F） ...Parents can buy their children some ice-cream. The ice-cream there tastes great.“可知孩子在圣马可广场可以吃冰激凌和看鸽子，故选D67 4 .最佳标题题通读全文可知本文主要介绍了威尼斯这个可以去旅游的好地方，故选BAre you always looking for an excuse to put off （ 推迟）housework and cleaning for justanother day? Well, you can do it today. Today is No Housework Day. It's time to forgethousework and relax.No Housework Day is always on April 7 th. On this day, you can do anything except （ 除了）housework. You can have someone else do housework for a day. Housework is a dailyand endless job. And most people think it's boring to do housework. I have many friends andtheir wish is to stay away from housework. But their wish can never come true.Do you know how to celebrate No Housework Day? Well, there are two different ways.If you really do the housework around the house, forget it_on this day, enjoy the day, relax anddo anything except housework.If you never do housework, you can do it for your family. It gives your parents a breakfrom the housework. And by doing housework, you will know how much housework yourparents need to do every day.675. The writer has many friends and their wish is.A. to stay away from houseworkB. to ask others to do their houseworkC. to celebrate No Housework Day togetherD. to ask all the family members to do housework676. What does the underlined word refer to（ 指代） ?A. Two different ways B. Enjoying the day C. Housework D. No HouseworkDay677. If Lisa never does housework, the writer thinks she can on No HouseworkDay.A. forget housework B. do housework C. feel relaxed D. do anythingexcept housework678. This passage mainly tell us.A. all people can relax and do nothing on No Housework DayB. what No Housework Day is and how to celebrate itC. the story of celebrating No Housework DayD. housework is a daily and endless job【 答案】675. A676. C677. B678. B【 导语】本文是一篇说明文，主要介绍一个节日“ 无家务日” 及如何庆祝它。

675 . 细节理解题根据“I have many friends and their wish is to stay away fromhousework.”可知作者朋友的希望是远离家务，故选A676 . 词义猜测题根据“If you really do the housework around the house, forget jt on thisday”可知如果平时做家务，在这一天要忘记家务故“it”此处指代家务677 . 推理判断题根据"If you never do housework, you can do it for your family.”可知不做家务的可以在这一天为家人做家务，故选B6 7 8 .主旨大意题本文主要介绍一个节日“ 无家务日” 及如何庆祝它Do you want to be healthy? Now I will give you some advice.I think you should have a good eating habit. You should eat some healthy food. There isa lot of healthy food. You can eat more bananas, oranges and tomatoes, because they are goodfor your health. Don't eat junk food. It^ bad fbr your health. Healthy food can make youhappy and strong.Exercising is very important. You should exercise every day. You can go to school onfoot. At least, you should play basketball three or four times a week.A saying is that you must remember “Early to bed, early to rise, makes a man healthyand clever.^^ It means you must go to bed early and get up early next morning. By doing thisyou will be in good health.679. are healthy food.A. Junk food and bananasB. Hamburgers, fried chips and tomatoesC. Bananas, oranges and tomatoes680. Healthy food can make you.A. tired and happy B. happy and strong C. thin and strong681. If you want to be healthy, you s houl d.A. not play basketball B. go to school by bus C. go to school on foot682. In the sentence “Early to bed, early to rise...”, "rise" me ans .A. getup B. go to bed C. sleep683. Which sentence is TRUE according to the passage?A. Healthy lifestyle can keep a man thin.B. Junk food is not good for your health.C. Exercising is only running.【 答案】679. C680. B681. C682. A683. B【 导语】本文就如何保持健康给出了一些建议，比如好的饮食习惯，适当的锻炼，早睡早起等。

679 . 细节理国军题根据"You can eat more bananas, oranges and tomatoes, because they aregood fbr your health.”可知，香蕉、橙子和西红柿是健康食物680 . 细节理解题根据“Healthy food can make you happy and strong.”可知，健康的食物可以让你快乐和强壮681 . 细节理解题根据“You can go to school on foot. At least, you should play basketballthree or four times a week.”可知，走路去上学和打篮球都是锻炼身体的方法故选Co6 8 2 .词义猜测题根据"It means you must go to bed early and get up early next moming.^^可知，这意味你必须早点上床睡觉，第二天早上要早起，故此处“rise”表示“ 起床” ，即get up« 故选 A683 . 细节理解题根据"Don't eat junk fbod. It's bad fbr your health.”可知，垃圾食品对健康有害。

故选BShelly is a cute girl. She is 10 years old. Today is August 30, the day before the schoolday, Her mother takes her to her new school for the first time. They meet Shelly's newteacher, Mrs. Miller.Mrs. Miller says, “Welcome to our school, Shelly. I am your English teacher.Shellyloves her new teacher very much. She then knows what she can do at school from Mrs.Miller.The first class starts at 8:00 in the morning from Monday to Friday. Students usuallyread and write in English class. After that, they have a math class at 8:50. Math is a littledifficult but very useful. After 40 minutes, students can go out to relax for half an hour. Boysand girls all love it! They can do many kinds of activities like playing basketball, playingsoccer and telling stories. At ten o'clock, students have history class for 40 minutes. Thehistory teacher always tells them interesting stories about famous（ 著名） people. After that,it's time for science class. It's Mr. White's class. He is very strict. Students must be on time!Students can eat lunch in the dining hall at 11:30. Then they can take a short rest. At 1:30p.m. they need to go to the computer room to have class. There they learn how to use thecomputer. At 2:20 p.m. they have music class. In the music class, students can sing, dance,play the guitar or play the violin. They can go home at 3:00 in the afternoon.根据材料内容选择最佳答案。

684 . Mrs. Miller teaches at school.A. mathB. EnglishC. history685. What time can students go out to relax for half an hour?A. At 8:50 a.m. B. At 9:00 a.m. C. At 9:30 a.m. D. At 10:00 a.m.686. What dose the underlined word “activities“ mean in Chinese?A . 活动B . 研究c .描述思考687. Students have classes in the morning and classes in the afternoon.A. 3; 2B. 4; 3D. 4; 2688. What is the best tille（ 标题） for the text?A. Shelly's living habitsShelly's family lifeC. Shelly's school lifeShelly's school rules【 答案】684. B685. C686. A687. D688. C【 分析】文章大意：Shelly是一个10岁女孩，今天是8 月 3 0 日，开学的前一天，她妈妈第一次带她去她的新学校。

她们见到了 Shelly的新老师米勒夫人米勒夫人向Shelly介绍了新学校的生活情况684 . 细节理解题根据“Mrs. Miller says,4 Welcome to our school, Shelly. I am yourEnglish teacher.， ”米勒夫人说：“Shelly,欢迎来到我们学校我是你们的英语老师 可知米勒夫人是教英语的，故选B685 . 推理判断题根据“After that, they have a math class at 8:50. Math is a little difficultbut very useful. After 40 minutes, students can go out to relax for half an hour.”可 矢 口 ， 学生们上午8:50有数学课，40分钟后，可以出去放松半个小时，也就是上午9:30可以去放松半小时，故选C686 . 词义猜测题根据"like playing basketball, playing soccer and telling stories.”可知，打篮球、踢足球和讲故事这些都属于课外活动，因此activities应是“ 活动” 的意思，故选 Ao687 . 归纳理解题。

根据"The first class starts at 8: 00 in the morning from Monday toFriday. Students usually read and write in English class. After that, they have a math class at8:50...At ten o'clock, students have history class for 40 minutes.... After that, it's time forscience class.”可知上午有英语、数学、历史和科学四门课程；再根据“At 1:30 P.m. theyneed to go to the computer room to have class.... At 2:20 p.m. they have music class.“可知下午有计算机和音乐两门课程6 8 8 .标题归纳题根据"She then knows what she can do at school from Mrs. Miller.”结合文章内容，可知本文主要介绍了 Shelly新学校的生活情况，故选C。

Hi, friends! What do you like to do after school? In my school, we have different（ 不同的） things to do.EIPeter does his homework（ 家庭作业） in the classroom. Helikes doing his homework at school. The classroom building is inthe middle of the school.i3户 ；iLucy likes playing on the playground. Many students playthere after school. The playground is behind the classroombuilding.s.Jack likes reading books in the library after school. There arelots of books in the library. The library is on the left of theclassroom building.II瀛Students can play computer games in the science building.Betty likes playing computer games after school. The sciencebuilding is on the right of the classroom building.A. doing sports689. Theis in the middle of the school.A. playgroundB. office building C. science building D. classroombuilding690. ________likes playing on the playground.A. LucyB. Betty C. Peter D. Jack691. Jack likesafter school.B , going homeC. reading booksD. doing hishomework692. Betty may always play computer games .A. on the playgroundB. in the office buildingC. in the classroom buildingD. in the science building693. Which of the following is NOT true?A. The four are at the same school.B. Peter does his homework with Lucy at school.C. The library is on the left of the science building.D. The classroom building is in front of the playground.【 答案】689. D690. A691. C692. D693. B【 分析】文章是介绍自己的学校放学后同学们喜欢做的不同的活动。

689 . 细节理解题根据文中“The classroom building is in the middle of the school.“可知 I，教学楼在学校的中央，故选D690 . 细节理解题根据文中“Lucy likes playing on the playground”可知，Lucy喜欢在操场上玩，故选A691 . 细节理解题根据文中“Jack likes reading books in the library after school.”可知，Jack喜欢在图书馆看书，故选C692 . 细节理解题根据文中“Students can play computer games in the science building.Betty likes playing computer games after school.”可知，Betty 在科学楼玩电脑游戏，故选Do693 . 细节理解题根据文中"Peter does his homework（ 家庭作业） in the classroom.”及“Lucy likes playing on the playground.”可知，他们两个做不同的事情, Peter并没有和Lucy一起做作业，故选B。

Are you looking for a fun Earth Day activity? You may want to try plogging—pickingup litter while jogging. The new "sport“ is becoming more and more popular with runners allover the world.Plogging is the idea of Erik Alstrom. In 2016, Erik Alstrom moved to Stockholm, thecapital of Sweden. During his daily bike ride to work, he saw quite a lot of litter on the road.Then he started plogging and other joggers soon joined Alstrom. By the end of 2016, theactivity became so popular that it spread from Sweden to many other countries.Plogging is not only good for the environment, it is also a good way to exercise.According to Swedish fitness app Lifesun, if you try plogging for half an hour, you will burnabout 288 calories （ 卡路里） . This is about 50 calories more than you would burn when justjogging.So put on your running shoes, carry a litter bag or two, and start plogging now. Lefsmake every day Earth Day!694. When did plogging start?A. in 2016 B. in 2017 C. In 2018 D. in2019695 . Why did Erik Alstrom start plogging?A. Because he liked sports very much. B. Because he worked as a cleaner inSweden.C. Because he saw a lot of litter on the road. D. Because he enjoyed helping otherpeople.696. Why is Swedish fitness app Lifesun mentioned in paragraph 3?A. To offer the ways of exercising properly.B. To show that plogging is good to health.C. To show that plogging is good to the environment.D. lb show that plogging can help people bum more calories.697. What do you need to start plogging?A. A warm coat and a big hat.C. A pair of running shoes and a schoolbag.bags.698. What is the best title for the passage?A. A new “Sport" for Runners.B. A big raincoat and a litter bag.D. pair of running shoes and some litterB. A New and Interesting Way to Keep Fit.C. A Good Way to Reduce the Amount of Trash. D. A Fun Activity for Earth Day andEvery Day.【 答案】694. A695. C696. D697. D698. D【 导语】本文是一篇说明文。

讲述“ 跑步捡垃圾” 这项活动，于 2016年发起于瑞典并很快风靡全球这项活动不仅对环境有好处，也是进行锻炼的•种好方式694 . 细节理解题根据第二段“Plogging is the idea of Erik Alstrom. In 2016, Erik... sawquite a lot of litter on the road. Then he started plogging and other joggers soon joinedAlstrom.”可知，跑步捡垃圾开始于2016年，故选A695 . 细节理解题根据第二段“he saw quite a lot of litter on the road. Then he startedplogging”可知，因为他看到路上有很多垃圾，然后便开始跑步捡垃圾696 . 细节理解题根据第三段“ According to Swedish fitness app Lifesun, if you tryplogging for half an hour, you will burn about 288 calories （ 卡路里） . This is about 50 caloriesmore than you would bum when just jogging.“可知I , 根据瑞典健身应用程序 Lifesun 的数据，跑步捡垃圾半小时要比纯粹慢跑半小时多燃烧50卡路里的热量。

故选D697 . 细节理解题根据最后一段“So put on your running shoes, carry a litter bag or two,and start plogging now”可知，穿上跑鞋，带上一两个垃圾袋，就可以开始跑步捡垃圾的活动了故选Do698 . 标题归纳题根据第•段”Are you looking for a fun Earth Day activity? You maywant to try plogging”以及最后一段“...start plogging now. Let's make every day Earth Day”可知，跑步捡垃圾活动是一项有趣的地球日活动，同时也会让每一天都变成地球日，D 项最适合做标题For the first time, the Palace Museum opened its doors to the public at night for two daysin February, 2019. It gives visitors the chance to see its palaces and temples in beautifullights. The idea was a hit.The webpage for people to sign for free tickets went wrong because of traffic. Themuseum gave away 500 tickets for people to, join 2,500 invited guests（ 特邀嘉宾） onTuesday, and another 3,000 tickets for Wednesday night.These lucky visitors enjoyed light shows and a Beijing opera show at the Belvedere ofPleasant Sounds, the Palace Museum's largest theatre. They could hear the music all over themuseum, as there were fewer people at night than during the day.The opening was part of an effort（ 努力） to change the image（ 形象） of the Palace Museumas it has always been conservative（ 保守 的） ."The more the Palace Museum does, the more influential有影响力的） it will be," saidShan Jixiang, the museum's director.Yang Jie visited the museum with her husband on Tuesday night. She said the light showwas wonderful.“It makes it possible to see a different side of the Palace Museum," she said.699. How many tickets did the museum give away in the two days?A. 500 B. 2,500 C. 3,000 D. 3,500700. What could the visitors do during the special opening hours?A. To see its palaces and temples in beautiful lights. B. To enjoy light shows.C. To enjoy a Beijing opera show in the theatre. D. All the above.701. People could hear the music all over the museum b e c a u s e .A. there were speakers everywhere.B. there were not many people visiting the museum at night.C. the museum was too loud for everyone to hear.D. the music was loud enough for everyone to hear.【 答案】699. D700. D701. B【 分析】2019年 2 月，故宫博物院首次夜间对外开放，这受到了人们的广泛好评，一些幸运的游客还获得了免费的门票，去故宫观看灯光秀和京剧表演。

6 9 9 .细节理解题根据第二段“The museum gave away 500 tickets for people to, join2,500 invited guesls（ 特邀嘉宾） on Tuesday, and another 3,000 tickets for Wednesday night.^^可知，故宫博物院在周二赠送了 500张门票，周三赠送3,000张，所以一共是3,500张7 0 0 .细节理解题根据短文第一段“It gives visitors the chance to see its palaces andtemples in beautifUI lights."和第三段"These lucky visitors enjoyed light shows and a Beijingopera show at the Belvedere of Pleasant Sounds, the Palace Museum's largest theatre.“可知,夜间去故宫参观的游客可以看到里面的宫殿、寺庙、欣赏灯光秀和京剧A、B、C 三项都在文中提到了，故选D。

701. 细节理解题 o 根据第三段“They could hear the music all over the museum, as therewere fewer people at night than during the day.”可知，游客们可以在博物馆各处听到音乐，因为晚上的人比白天少Sally was a student. It was going to be her mother's birthday. She wanted to buy her agift. It would be nice and useful but not expensive.She went shopping after a quick and simple lunch. After she looked for half an hour, shedecided to buy a black umbrella.She thought, “Mom can cany it when she is wearing clothes of any color." So shebought a lovely black umbrella and took it to school with her until her classes finished.On her way home, on the train she felt hungry because she had so little for lunch. So shewent to the bujfet car （ 餐车） . She left the umbrella on her seat.But when she got back, it was lost!Sally started to cry. The other passengers（ 乘客）felt very sorry for her and asked whatwas the matter. She told them she bought a black umbrella fbr her mother, but it was lost, andshe had to get off at the next station. After the three passengers heard this, they asked her forher mother's add/ess（ 地址） ， they said they would send the umbrella to her if they found it.And now a week passed. Sally got a letter from her mother. It said "Thank you verymuch fbr your lovely gifts, but why do you send me three black umbrellas?^^702. Which has the same meaning as “Mom can carry it when she is wearing clothes of anycolor”?A. Mom is beautiful in any clothes.B. Mom can buy any clothes that she likes to wear.C. Mom must carry it when she is wearing any clothes.D. The color of the umbrella is OK fbr Mom's clothes of any color.703. Where did Sally find the umbrella was lost?A. On the train. B. In the shop.C. At her school. D. At the train station.704. From the passage, we can know that.A. Sally sent one umbrella to her mom at lastB. nobody on the train took away the umbrellaC. the three passengers sent an umbrella to Sally's mother eachD. Sally's mother would write to her if Sally didn't send a gift to her705 . The best title for the story is "A. A clever girl B. The story of an umbrellaC. On the train D. A happy mother706. The writer wants to tell us.A. we should often send our parents giftsB. it's no use crying when we are in troubleC. we should look after our things when we are travellingD. if we show our love to others, we can get love from others【 答案】702. D703. A704. C705. B706. D【 导语】本文主要讲述了萨利买伞给妈妈作生日礼物的故事。

702 . 词句猜测题根据"She thought, 44Mom can carry it when she is wearing clothes ofany color.” So she bought a lovely black umbrella and ” 可知这句话是指这把伞的颜色适合妈妈穿任何颜色的衣服703 . 细节理解题根据"on the train she felt hungry because she had so little for lunch. Soshe went to the buffet car （ 餐车） . She left the umbrella on her seat.”可知萨利把伞丢在火车上，故选A704 . 细节理解题根据“After the three passengers heard this, they asked her for hermother's address（ 地址） , they said they would send the umbrella to her if they found it.”以及“Thank you very much for your lovely gifts, but why do you send me three black umbrellas^^可知三个乘客每人送了一把伞给萨利的妈妈，故选C。

705 . 最佳标题题通读全文可知，文章是围绕萨利给妈妈买伞展开叙述，所以B 选项“ 一把伞的故事” 最适合，故选B706 . 推理判断题根据萨利的妈妈收到三把雨伞可知三个乘客每个人都寄了一把伞，可推知，作者想通过这个故事告诉我们：如果我们向别人表达我们的爱，我们就能从别人那里得到爱Ifs known to us all that New York is the biggest city of the USA. A long time ago, itwas called Lenapehoking. In 1626, Dutch（ 荷兰） people bought the land for only $ 24! Theycalled it New Amsterdam. Then in 1664, the British took it over and changed the name toNew York.New York had an excellent harbour（ 港 口） . Many people from all over the world cameby sea and landed in New York. These people wanted a better life. New York seemed to givethem that. By 1835, New York became the largest city in the United States. New York Cityused to have five smaller towns but now they are all part of the same city. They areManhattan, Brooklyn, Queens, the Bronx and Staten Island.Today, New York is home to millions of people from all over the world. These differentcultures make New York an exciting place to visit. There's much to do in New York. You cantake a helicopter（ 直升飞机） riding through the city, ride horses in Central Park, see a moviein the afternoon and watch the sunset（ 日 落） over the Brooklyn Bridge. Don't worry if you gethungry. Some restaurants are open 24 hours a day!707. In the year 1626, New York was cal l ed.A. Lenapehoking B. New Amsterdam C. New York D. Manhattan708. A long time ago, many people came to New York.A. by train B. because it was beautifulC. to look for a better life D. to travel709. New York became the largest city in the United St at es.A. about three hundred years ago B. about two hundred years agoC. about four hundred years ago D. one hundred years ago710. The writer suggests（ 建议） that the tourists watch the sunset in.A. Brooklyn B. Queens C. the Bronx D. Staten Island711. Which of the following is NOT TRUE about New York?A. The city got the name "New York,, in 1664.B. New York is a big and exciting city.C. New York has five smaller towns now.D. If you are hungry at 3 a. m ., you can go to a restaurant.【 答案】707. B708. C709. B710. A711. C【 导语】本文主要讲述了美国最大城市——纽约的历史。

它最初是荷兰人用24美元从印第安人手里买下来的，后来英国人占领了这个岛屿，改名为纽约现在的纽约非常繁华，不同的文化的融合使其成为许多人参观的地方7 0 7 .细节理解题根据“In 1626, Dutch（ 荷兰） people bought the land for only $ 24! Theycalled it New Amsterdam”可知，纽约被称为新阿姆斯特丹，故填B7 0 8 .细节理解题 o 根据“Many people from all over the world came by sea and landed inNew York. These people wanted a betterlifb”可知，来这想要更好的生活，故选 Co7 0 9 .细节理解题根据“By 1835, New York became the largest city in the United States.”可知，距离现在有180多年了，故选B710 . 细节理解题根据“see a movie in the afternoon and watch the sunset（ I I 落） over theBrooklyn Bridge”可知，建议在布鲁克林大桥上看日落，故选A。

711 . 推理判断题根据"New York City used to have five smaller towns but now they areall part of the same city”可知，过去有五个小镇而不是现在，C 表述错误，故选CHongcun, with a history of about 900 years, is a beautiful village in Anhui Province.Located under Mount Huang, the village has kept the main Chinese styles from ancient times.It's also one of World Heritage Sites.Walk slowly along the old stone streets and roads, and you will feel like travelling backin time. All the houses with grey roofs and white walls were built during the Ming and QingDynasties. The front gate of each house is decorated with red Chinese knots and lanterns. Allof them are outlined against the blue sky and reflected into the clear rivers, lakes with darkgreen mountains around. Ifs a living water-ink picture.Step into a tea house to take a rest. A piece of classical music, played by guqin, fills upthe house and goes into your hearts, as if you hear birds singing and rivers running. You willbe lost in a world, full of peace and pleasure. Holding the tea cup, some lines of poems willcome into your mind:No dust is rising on the road, went with morning rain.The willows by the hotel look so fresh and green.Walk out of the tea house, and go to the open-air theatre. The actors with colored make­ups are performing in special clothes. This special Huangmei Opera is different from others,such as K un Opera, Beijing Opera and Yue Opera. Also, you can enjoy all kinds of quyi here:crosstalk, kouji and pingshu.If you want to feel more about Hongcun, plan a visit to it right now.Word Bankstyle风格World Heritage Sites世界文化遗产roof屋顶make-up 脸绘7 12. From the passage, we know that H o n g c u n . A . is an old beautiful village witha history of about 600 yearsB. is the only one World Heritage Site in ChinaC. lies under Mount Hua in Shaanxi ProvinceD. has kept the main Chinese styles from the Ming and Qing Dynasties7 13. What's the correct meaning of the underlined word “reflecled“ in the passage?A.倒映 B .反射 C.衬托 D.映衬7 14. In the village tea house, what elements （ 元素）of China are mentioned?①tea ©Chinese knots③classical music ④ poems ⑤ Huangmei Opera⑥pingshuA. ①③④ B . ③⑤⑥ C. ①@⑥ D . ③④⑥7 15. Through the description of Hongcun, the passage shows us.A. the influence of Chinese literatureB . the beauty of Chinese cultureC. the importance of Chinese customsD. the history of Chinese art【 答案】7 12. D7 13. A714. A715. B【 分析 1 本文介绍了被联合国教科文组织确定为世界文化遗产之一的宏村，介绍了它的地理位置、美丽的自然景光以及文化艺术等，它保留了中国古代的主要风格。

712 . 推理判断题根据第二段“All the houses with grey roofs and white walls were builtduring the Ming and Qing Dynasties”可知，宏村所有的灰色屋顶和白色墙壁的房子都建于明清时期，即保留了明清时期的中国主要风格；故选D713 . 词义猜测题第二段中“ …All of them are outlined against the blue sky”所有这些都在蓝天的映衬下轮廓分明，根据“into the clear rivers, lakes and ponds”提示可知，可知此处指“ 所有的景色倒映在水中“ ；故选A714 . 推理判断题根据第三段“Step into a tea house to take a rest. A piece of classicalmusic, played by guqin...Holding the tea cup, some lines of poems on its out layer will comeinto your sight”可知，在茶馆提到了古典音乐、茶以及诗；故选A。

715 . 主旨大意题本文介绍了宏村的地理位置、美丽的自然景光以及文化艺术等，展示中国文化之美；故选BA picture is on my desk. It is a picture of Mary's family. The man is her father Mr.White. He is a doctor. A woman is behind Mary. She is her mother. She's a teacher. A boy isin the picture, too. He is Mary's brother, Sam. Mary and Sam are in the same school. But theyaren't in the same grade. They look like their mother. The White family are English. Theycome from London.719. Who does Sam look like?716. Is the picture about the White family?A. Yes, it is.B. No, it isn't.C. Yes, they do.D. No,they don't.717. What does Mr. White do?A. He's a doctor.B. He's a teacher.C. He's a nurse.D. He's a farmer.718. What does Mrs. White do?A. She's a doctor.B. She's a teacher.C. She's a nurse.D. She?s a farther.A. He looks like a cook.B. He looks like a doctor.C. He looks like his mother.D. He looks like his father.720. Where are the White family from?A. They^e from the U.S.A. B. They^e from Cuba.C. They^e from England. D. They7e from Japan.【 答案】716. A717. A718. B719. C720. C【 分析】试题分析：本篇文中主要讲述的是我桌子上的一张照片；是玛丽的一张全家福；分别介绍了她的家庭成员和他们的职业。

716 . 细节理解题根据短文倒数第二句The White family are English.可知照片是他的全家福 故选A717 . 细节理解题由短文第四句He is a doctor可知他是一名医生结合语境故选A718 . 细节理解题由短文第七句S he'a teacher.可知她是一名教师故选B719 . 细节理解题根据短文倒数第三句They look like their mother可知看起来像妈妈故选C720 . 细节理解题根据短文最后一句They come from London.可知他们来自英国故选 C考点：布告类短文阅读Boys and girls, we have some interesting and fine things for you this term. Have a goodtime.English clubMath ExamFor the seventh-grade studentsFor the ninth-grade studentsTime: Tuesday afternoon and Friday eveningTime: on Monday, Marth 20thPlace: Room 301Place: room 306Tel: 77459312PS: Top 10 will get a surpriseA TalkSinging CompetitionFor all studentsFor the eighth-grade studentsTime: 14:30-16:30, April 25thTime: on Tuesday, May 23rdPlace: in the school hallPlace: in the music roomTopic: How to learn English wellTel: 58172352721. What activity will the school have on May 23rd?A. A math exam. B. A singingcompetition.C. An English speech contest. D. A talk about how to learn English well.722. Where will Tom, a ninth-grade student, probably be at 3:00 p.m. on April 25Ih?A. In Room301. B. In Room 306. C. In the school hall. D. In the musicroom.723. How often do the English club members practice spoken English?A. Once a week. B. Twice a week. C. Three times a week. D. Four times aweek.【 答案】721. B722. C723. B【 分析】本文介绍了一个学校的一些安排，英语俱乐部、数学考试、演讲和歌唱比赛。

7 2 1 .细节理解题根据“Singing Competition： on Tuesday, May 2 3 " 可知, 学校将于 5月 2 3 日举行歌唱比赛7 2 2 .推理判断题根据“A Talk： 14:30-16:30, April 25th； in the school hall”可知, 一个九年级的学生，可能会在4 月 2 5 日下午3 点在学校礼堂里7 2 3 .细节理解题根据"English club： Tuesday afternoon and Friday evening”可知，英语俱乐部成员每周练习两次英语口语。